639467

Kubota B2400 Handleiding

13
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/233
Pagina verder
5
BRAKES
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
121
HSTtype 3.17 U.S.gals
Transmission oil
2.6Imp.gals
capacity
Manual
111
tra
nsm
ission type
2.9 U.S.gals
2.4lmp.gals
II
IMPORTANT
•
Use
only
multi-grade transmission oil.
Use
of
other
oils may
damage the transmission
or
hydraulic system.
Refer
to
"LUBRICANTS
AND FLUID"
(See
page G-8).
• Never
work
the
tractor
immediately
after
changing
the
transmission oil. Keeping the engine
at
medium speed
for
a
few
minutes
to
prevents damage
to
the transmission.
• Do
not
mix
different
blands oil together.
(A) Oil level acceptable
within
this
range.
(1) Drain Plug (3) Gauge
(2) Filling Plug
[2] BRAKE ASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING
(1) Separating Rear
Axle
Case
with
Brake Assembly
Drain the Transmission Fluid
1.
Place
oi I
pans
underneath the transmission
case.
2.
Remove the four drain plugs (1).
3.
Drain the transmission oil.
4.
Reinstall the four drain plugs
(1).
(When refilling)
• Fill up from
filling
port
after removing plug
(2)
until reaching
the
gauge
(3).
•
After
running the engine
for
few
minutes, stop
it
and check
the
oil level again. Add the oil
to
prescribed level
if it
is
not
correct level.
B177FG06
5-54
81700·82100·82400 WSM, 11770
(2) Wheel Hub
Pin
5
BRAKES
RearWheel
1.
Place
ajack under
the
transmission
case.
2.
Loosen
the
rear wheel cotter (1) setting
bolt
and nut.
3.
Take
out
the
wheel hub
pi
n (2).
4.
Take
out
the
rear wheel.
l1li
IMPORTANT
48
When
re-fitting
or adjusting a wheel,
tighten
the
bolts
to
the
following
torques then recheck
after
driving
the
tractor
200
m (200 yards) and there
after
daily
check service.
(When reassembling)
Rearwheel cotter
123to147N'm
Tightening torque
setting
bolt
and
nut
12.6
to
15.0
kgf'm
91
to
108 ft-Ibs
8177P168
(1) Differential Lock
Rod
(2) 8rake
Rod
(3)
Rear
Axle
Case
Rear
Axle
Case
with
Brake Assembly
1.
Disconnect
the
differential lock rod (1).
2.
Disconnect
the
brake rod (2).
3.
Remove
the
rear axle
case
mounting screw.
4.
Separate
the
rear axle
case
(3) from differential gear
case.
(When reassembling)
48
Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D
or
equivalent)
to
joint
face
of
the
rear axle
case
and
differential
gear
case
after
eliminating
the
water, oil and stuck liquid gasket.
Rear
axle
case
mounting
39
to
44 N'm
Tightening torque
4.0
to
4.5 kfl:t.m
screws
29to
33
ft-
s
Differential Lock Shift Fork and Differential Lock Clutch
1.
Remove
the
spring (1).
2.
Draw
out
the
differential lock shift
fork
(2) and
differential
lock clutch (3).
(1)
Spring
(3)
Differential
Lock
Clutch
(2)
Differential
Lock
Shift Fork
5-55
5
BRAKES
(2)
Disassembling
Brake
Assembly
B177F506
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
57TGear
1.
Remove
the external
snap
ring
(3)
and remove the bearing
(2).
2.
Draw
out
the
57T
gear (1) from the rear axle (4).
(1) Gear (3) External Snap Ring
(2) Bearing (4) Rear Axle
Brake Assembly
1.
Remove
the internal
snap
ring (1).
2.
Remove
the brake shaft (2)
with
brake
discs.
(When reassembling)
.. When installing the internal snap ring (1)
to
rear axle
case
(3)
as
shown in the figure
left
.
.. When installing
the
bearing holder (4)
to
the rear axle
case
(3), do
not
forget
to
install
the
straight pin
(5).
(Refer
to
the
photo. below.)
(1) Internal Snap
Ring
(4) Bearing Holder
(2) Brake Shaft (5) Straight
Pin
(3) Rear Axle
Case
B177P173
(1) External Snap Ring (2) Hole
Brake
Discs
and Friction Plate
1.
Remove
the
external
snap
ring (1) and remove
the
brake
discs
and friction plate.
2.
Remove
the
cam
plate and balls.
3.
Remove
the external
snap
ring and pull
out
the brake
cam
lever.
(When reassembling)
.. Install the brake
discs
with
their
holes (2) deviation
at
less
than 1/3
ofthe
total hole area.
5-56
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770
SERVICING
5
BRAKES
B177P177
Brake
Cam
Lever Movement
1.
Move the brake
cam
lever
by
hand
to
check
the
movement.
2.
If
the
movement
is
heavy,
refine
the
brake cam
with
sandpaper.
B177P174
Cam
Plate Flatness and Bearing HolderWear
1.
Place
a straightedge
of
150
mm
(5.91
in.) or more in length
on the contacting surface
of
the
cam
plate and
the
bearing
holder.
2.
Inspect the friction surface
of
the
cam
plate and
the
bearing
holder
with
the straightedge, and determine
if
a
0.30
mm
(0.0118 in.) feeler gauge
will
fit
on the part
of
wear.
If
it
will
fit,
resurface.
Height
of
Cam
Plate and Ball
1.
Measure
the
dimensions
of
the
cam
plate
with
the
ball
installed.
2.
If
the measurement
is
less
than the allowable limit, replace
the
cam
plate and balls.
3.
Inspect the ball holes
of
cam
plate
for
uneven wear.
If
the
uneven wear
is
found, replace it.
Factory
spec.
22.89
to
22.99 mm
Height
of
cam
plate
0.9012 toO.9051 in.
and ball
22.40 mm
Allowable
limit
0.8819 in.
Brake
Disc
and Friction Plate Wear
1.
Measure
the
brake disc thickness and
the
friction
plate
thickness
with
an
outside micrometer.
2.
Ifthe
thickness
is
less
than
the
allowable limit, replace it.
Factory spec.
3.3to3.5
mm
0.130toO.138 in.
Brake disc thickness
Allowable
limit
3.0mm
0.118in.
Factory
spec.
1.92
to
2.08 mm
0.0756toO.0819 in.
Plate
th
ickness
Allowable
limit
1.52 mm
0.0598 in.
5-57
MECHANISM
CONTENTS
[1] STRUCTURE
6-M1
[2] FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
6-M2
B1700·B2100'B2400 WSM, 11770
[1] STRUCTURE
6 FRONT AXLE
B177F601
(1)
Bevel Gear
Case
(7)
Spiral Bevel Gear
(13)
Bevel Gear (19)
Pinion Shaft
(2)
Bevel Gear
(8)
Collar
(14)
Bevel Gear (20)
Differential
Assembly
(3)
Differential
Yoke Shaft
(9)
Front Axle Bracket, Front
(15)
Bevel Gear Shaft
(21)
Front Axle Bracket, Rear
(4)
Front Axle
Case
(10)
Axle Flange
(16)
Bevel Gear
(22)
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
(5)
Differential
Case
(11
)
Axle
(17)
Front Gear
Case
(23)
Coupling
(6)
Differential
Pinion
(12)
Collar
(18)
Differential
Side Gear
(24)
Propeller Shaft
The
front
axle
of
the 4WD
is
constructed
as
shown
above. Power
is
transmitted from the transmission
through
the
propeller shaft (24)
to
the spiral bevel
pinion shaft
(22), then
to
the
spiral bevel gear (7) and
to
the differential gear (18).
The
power
through the
differential
side gear
is
transmitted
to
the
differential yoke shaft (3), and
to
the bevel gear shaft (15) through the bevel gears (2),
(4) in
the
bevel gear
case
(1).
The
revolution
is
greatly
reduced by
the
bevel
gears
(16),
(13), then the power
is
transmitted
to
the
axle(11).
The
differential
system
allows
each
wheel
to
rotate
at
a
different
speed
to
make turning easier.
6-M1
6
FRONT
AXLE
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770
[2] FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
To
assure smooth
mobility
or maneuverability and
enhance
stable
and
straight
running,
the
front
wheels are mounted
at
an
angle
to
the
right,
left
and
forward directions.
This
arrangement
is
referred
to
as
the Front Wheel Alignment.
[Camber]
[Kingpin Angle]
//i
a
C045F051
C045F053
The
front
wheels are
tilted
from the vertical
as
viewed
from
the
front,
upper wheels are spreader
than
lower
ones.
This inclination
is
called camber (a). Camber
reduces
bending
or
twisting
of
the
front
axle
caused
by vertical load or running resistance, and
also maintains
the
stability in running.
The
kingpin
is
tilted
from the vertical
as
viewed
from the front.
This
angle
is
called kingpin angle (a).
As
with
the
camber, kingpin angle reduces rolling resistance
of
the wheels, and prevents any shimmy
motion
of
the
steering wheel.
It also reduces steering effort.
Camber 0.035 rad. I I
Kin~pin
_____
.L.-
2_o_______
inclination
0.209 rad.
12°
C045F052
The
kingpin
is
tilted
forward
as
viewed from
the
side. The
point
(b)
of
the
wheel
center line
is
behind
the
point
(a)
of
the
kingpin
shaft center
line.
This
inclination
is
called caster
(c).
Caster helps
provide steering stability.
As
with
the
kingpin inclination, caster reduces
steering
effort.
C045F054
Viewing the
front
wheels
from
above reveals
that
the distance between
the
toes
of
the
front
wheels
is
smaller than
that
between the heels.
It
is
called toe-in.
The
front
wheels tend
to
roll
outward due
to
the camber,
but
toe-in offsets
it
and ensures parallel rolling
of
the
front
wheels.
Another purpose
of
toe-in
is
to
prevent excessive
and uneven wear oftires.
t
Rear
Front
[Toe-in]
Rear
1-
Front
[Caster]
_
__
Ca_s_te_r_-'-
o_ro_~d_·
1 1
__
T_o_e-_in
1_t_o_10_m_m
....J
. 0.04
to
0.39 in.
6-M2
BGRVICING
CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING 6-51
SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS 6-52
TIGHTENING TORQUES 6-53
CHECKING. DISASSEMBLING
AND
SERVICING 6-53
CHECKING
AND
ADJUSTING 6-53
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING 6-55
(1) Separating Front Axle 6-55
(2) Disassembling Front Axle 6-56
SERVICING 6-510
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,
11770
TROUBLESHOOTING
6
FRONT
AXLE
Symptom
Probable Cause Solution
Reference
Page
Front Wheels
•
Tire pressure uneven Adjust G-35
Wander
to
Right
or
•
Improper
toe-in
adjustment
(improper
Adjust 6-53
Left
alignment)
• Clearance between
front
axle
case
boss
and
Replace
6-511
front
axle bracket
(front,
rear) excessive
•
Front axle rocking force
too
small Adjust 6-54
•
Front wheel sway excessive
Replace 6-54
•
Tie-rod end loose Tighten
6-56
•
Air
sucked in
power
steering circuit Bleed
7-510
Front Wheels
Can
• Front wheel
driving
gears in
front
axle gear
Replace
6-57
Not
Be
Driven
case
broken
•
Universal
joint
broken
Replace 6-55
•
Front wheel drive gears in transmission
Replace
-
broken
•
Front
differential
gear broken Replace 6-59
•
5hift
fork
broken Replace
-
•
Coupling displaced Reassemble 6-55
Noise
• Gear backlash excessive
Adjust
or
replace
6-510to
512
•
Oil insufficient
Replenish
G-18
•
Bearings damaged
or
broken
Replace
-
•
Gears damaged
or
broken
Replace
-
•
5piral bevel
pinion
shaft
turning
force
Adjust
6-511
improper
6-51
6
FRONT
AXLE
SERVICING
SPECIFICATIONS
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
Item
Factory Specification
Allowable
Limit
Front Wheel
Alignment
Toe-in 1
to
10
mm
-
0.04
to
0.39 in.
Front Wheel Axial Sway
Less
than 5 mm
-
0.20 in.
Front Axle Rocking Force 49.0
to
117.7 N
-
5.0
to
12.0
kgf
11.0
to
26.51bs
Differential
Case,
Differential
Case
Clearance
0.040
to
0.082 mm .
0.17 mm
Cover
to
differential
Side Gear 0.00157
to
0.00323 in. 0.0067 in.
Differential
Case
1.0. 26.000to26.021 mm
-
1.02362
to
1.02445 in.
Differential
Case
Cover
1.0. 26.000
to
26.021 mm
-
1.02362
to
1.02445 in.
Differential
Side Gear
0.0.
25.939
to
25.960 mm
-
1.02122
to
1.02205 in.
Pinion Shaft
to
Differential
Pinion
Clearance 0.038
to
0.068 mm 0.17 mm
0.00150
to
0.00268 in.
0.0067 in.
Pinion Shaft
0.0.
9.972
to
9.987 mm
-
0.39260
to
0.39312 in.
Differential
Pinion
1.0.
10.025
to
10.040 mm
-
0.39469
to
0.39528 in.
Differential
Pinion
to
Differential
Side
Backlash
0.1
to
0.3 mm
-
Gear
0.004to
0.012 in.
Shim Thickness
0.8mm
-
0.031
in.
1.0mm
-
0.039 in.
1.2mm
-
0.047 in.
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft Turning Force
127.5to
166.7 N
-
B.Oto
17.0
kgf
28.7to37.5Ibs
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
to
Spiral Bevel Backlash
0.ltoO.3mm
-
Gear
0.004
to
0.012 in.
11
T Bevel Gear
to
16T
Bevel Gear
Backlash
0.10toO.30mm
-
0.0039
to
0.0118 in.
Shim
Thickness
0.8mm
-
0.031
in.
1.0mm
-
0.039 in.
1.2
mm
-
0.047 in.
l.4mm
-
0.055 in.
6-S2
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
6
FRONT
AXLE
(Continued)
Item
Factory Specification
Allowable
Limit
Front Axle
Case
Boss
(Front)
O.D.
49.920
to
49.945 mm
-
1.96535
to
1.96634 in.
Front Axle Bracket (Front) I.D.
50.150
to
50.200 mm
-
1.97441
to
1.97638 in.
Front Axle
Case
Boss
(Rear)
O.D.
64.91
Oto 64.940 mm
-
2.55551
to
2.55669 in.
Front Axle Bracket (Rear)
I.D.
65.150
to
65.200 mm
-
2.56496
to
2.56693 in.
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torques
of
screws and nuts on
the
table
below
are especially specified.
(For general
use
screws and nuts:
See
page
G-9)
Item
Nom
kgfom
ft-Ibs
Lock
nut
of
rocking force adjusting screw
23.5
to
27.5
2.4to
2.8
17.4t020.3
Slotted
nut
of
tie-rod end 17.7to 34.3
1.8to
3.5
13.0
to
25.3
Slotted
nut
of
drag
link
end
17.7t034.3
1.8to
3.5
13.0
to
25.3
Lock nuts
of
tie-rod
29.4to
34.3
3.0to
3.5
21.7
to
25.3
Front axle shaft bracket mounting screw
124to
147
12.6to
15.0
91
.1
to
108.5
Front wheel
mounting
nut
77.5t090.2
7.9to
9.2
57.1
to
66.5
Bevel
gear
case
mounting
screw
123.5to
147.0 12.6to 15.0
91.2to
108.4
Axle flange
mounting
screw
23.6to
27.4
2.4to
2.8
17.4t020.2
Spiral bevel
pinion
shaft lock
nut
98.1
to
117.7
10.0to
12.0
72.3
to
86.8
Differential
case
cover
mounting
screw 29.4
to
34.3 3.0
to
3.5
21.7
to
25.3
CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING
AND
SERVICING
CHECKING
AND
ADJUSTING
29.4
to
34.3 N'm
Tightening
torque
Lock nuts
3.0to3.5
kgf·m
21.7
to
25.3 ft-Ibs
Toe-in
1.
Inflate
the
tires
to
the
specified pressure.
2.
Turn
the
front
wheels straight ahead.
3.
Measure
the
toe-in (A-B).
4.
If
the
measurement
is
not
within
the
factory specifications,
adjust
the
tie-rod length.
1
to
10
mm
0.04
to
0.39 in.
(2) Tie-rod
Factory spec.
Toe-in (A-B)
(1) Lock
Nut
(A) Wheel
to
Wheel Distance
at
rear
(B)
Wheel
to
Wheel Distance
at
front
(C)
Front
Toe-in Adjustment
1.
Loosenthelocknuts(1}.
2.
Turn
the
tie-rod
(2)
until
to
be
factory specification.
3.
Tighten
the
lock nuts (1).
~I
B
A
~c
B161F155
6-S3
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING
(1) Separating
Front
Axle
6
FRONT
AXLE
Draining
FrontAxle
Case
Oil
1.
Place
oil pans underneath
the
front
axle
case.
2.
Remove both
right
and
left
drain plugs (3) and
filling
plug
(2)
to
drain the oil.
3.
Remove the
right
and
left
breather plugs.
4.
After
draining, reinstall
the
drain plugs (3).
5.
Fi
II
with
new
oil up
to
the
upper notch on
the
dipstick.
6.
After
filling, reinstall
the
filling
plug and breather plugs.
(When reassembling)
.. Apply grease
to
the
splines
ofthe
propeller shaft.
II
IMPORTANT
..
After
ten
minutes.
check
the
oil
level
again.
add
oil
to
prescribed level.
..
Use
KUBOTA
SUPER
UDT
fluid
or
SAE
80. 90 gear oil.
Refer
to
"LUBRICANTS.
FUEL
AND
COOLING
WATER",
(See
page G-8.)
Propeller Shaft
1.
Loosen
the
clamp
(5)
and slide
the
propeller shaft cover (1),
(4)
to
the
rear.
2.
Tap
out
the
spring pin (2), and then slide
the
coupling (3)
to
the
rear.
t.
(1
) Breather Plug
(2) Filling Plug
with
Dipstick
(3) Drain Plug
(A) Oil
level
is
acceptabel
within
this
range.
Front axle
case
oil capacity
(1) Propeller Shaft Cover
(2) Spring
Pin
(3) Coupling
3.71
3.9 U.S.qts.
3.3Imp.qts.
(4) Propeller Shaft Cover
(5) Clamp
(6) Propeller Shaft
3
B177F602
6-55
6
FRONT
AXLE
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
Drag Link
1.
Steer the
front
wheels
to
the left.
2.
Remove
the slotted
nut
and disconnect
the
drag
link
(2) from
the
knuckle arm (1).
II
IMPORTANT
•
After
tightening the
slotted
nut
to
the
specified
torque,
install the cotter pin
as
shown in the figure
left.
17.7
to
34.3
N'm
Tightening torque
Slotted
nut
1.8
to
3.5
kgf'm
13.0
to
25.3
ft-Ibs
030F129
(1)
Knuckle Arm
(2)
Drag Link
Front Gear
Case
Front Axle Bracket
(Front)
(3)
Tie-rod
(4)
Front Axle Bracket
(Rear)
Front Axle
1.
Place
the jacks under the
front
axle, and hang up the
front
axle frame
by
the hoist
to
support it.
2.
Remove
the
front
wheels.
3. Remove the
front
axle bracket (Front) mounting screws and
front
axle bracket
(Rear)
mounting
screws.
4. Separate the
front
axle from
the
front
axle frame.
5.
Remove
the slotted
nut
and disconnect
the
tie-rod (3) from
the
front
gear
case
(1).
6.
Remove
the
front
axle bracket (2), (4).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease
to
the oil
seal
of
front
axle bracket
(Rear)
(4).
Front axle bracket
124to
147 N'm
mounting screws
12.6to
15.0
k~f.m
91.1
to
108.5 t-Ibs
Front wheel mounting
77.5
to
90.2 N'm
Tightening torque
7.9
to
9.2
kgf'm
nuts
57.1
to
66.5
ft-Ibs
17.7to34.3
N'm
Slotted
nut
1.8
to
3.5
kgf'm
13.0to25.3ft-lbs
(2) Disassembling
Front
Axle
Bevel Gear
Case
and Front Gear
Case
1.
Remove
the bevel gear
case
mounting screws.
2.
Remove
the bevel gear
case
(3) and
front
gear
case
(4)
as
a
unit
from the
front
axle
case
(1).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease
to
the O-ring (2) and take care
not
to
damage
it.
•
Do
not
interchange
right
and
left
bevel gear
case
assemblies
and
right
and
left
front
gear
case
assemblies.
B177P181
(1)
Front Axle
Case
(2)
O-ring
(3) Bevel Gear
Case
(4)
Front Gear
Case
Bevel gear
case
123.5to
147.0 N'm
Tightening torque
12.6
to
15.0
k~f.m
mounting screw
91.2
to
108.4 t-Ibs
6-56
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
B177P184
6
FRONT
AXLE
Bevel Gear
Case,
Axle Flange and Front Gear
Case
1.
Remove the knuckle arm (Left side).
2.
Remove
the
axle flange
(1)
mounting
screw~.
3.
Remove
the
external snap ring (2).
4.
Remove
the
bevel gear
case
(3)
from
front
gear
case
(7).
5.
Remove
the
bevel gear shaft
(4)
and ball bearing.
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D
or
equivalent)
to
joint
face
of
the
axle flange
(1)
and
front
gear
case
(7)
after
eliminate
the
water, oil and stuck liquid gasket.
• Tighten
the
axle flange
mounting
screws and nuts diagonally
in several steps.
• Install
the
oil
seal
(6)
of
bevel gear
case,
noting
its direction
as
shown in the
figure
below.
Axle flange mounting
23.6to
27.4 N'm
Tightening
torque
2.4
to
2.8
kgf'm
screws
17.4
to
20.2 ft-Ibs
(1)
Axle Flange
(2)
External
Snap
Ring
(3)
Bevel Gear
Case
(4)
Bevel Gear Shaft
(5)
Thrust Collar
(6)
Oil
Seal
(7)
Front Gear
Case
B177F603
6-57
6
FRONT
AXLE
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
Bevel Gear
Case
Gears
1.
Remove
the
internal
snap
ring
(1).
2.
Take
out
the
bevel gears (4), (5)
with
ball bearings (3), (6),
and shims (2).
(When
reassembling)
• Install
the
shims (2)
to
their
original
position.
(Reference)
• Thickness
of
adjusting
shims:
0.8
mm
(0.031 in.) 1.2
mm
(0.047 in.)
1.0
mm
(0.039 in.)
Axle
1.
Remove
the
bearing.
2.
Take
out
the
bevel
gear
(2).
3.
Take
out
the
collar
(1).
4. Tap
out
the
axle (3).
(When
reassembling)
• Install
the
oil
seal (5)
of
axle
flange
(4),
noting
its
direction
as
shown
in
the
figure
below.
B177P186
(1) Internal
Snap
Ring
(2)
Shim
(3)
Ball Bearing
(4) Bevel Gear
(1) Collar
(2)
Bevel Gear
(3)
Axle
(5)
Bevel Gear
(6) Ball Bearing
(7) Bevel Gear
Case
(4)
Axle Flange
(5) Oil
Seal
B177P187
B177F605
6-58
B1700·B21 00'B2400 WSM, 11770
6
FRONT
AXLE
B177P190
B177P189
Collar
Lock
Nut
Differential Yoke Shaft
RH
Differential Yoke Shaft
LH
Ball Bearing
Collar
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11
)
(12)
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft and Differential Gear Assembly
1.
Take
out
the differential yoke shaft
(9),
(10).
2.
Remove
the internal snap ring
(5).
3.
Tap
out
the spiral bevel pinion shaft
(3)
by
the
brass
rod and
hammer.
4.
Take
out
the differential gear assembly
(2),
ball bearing (11)
and collar
(12)
from
right
side
of
front
axle
case
(1).
5.
Remove
the stake
of
lock
nut
(8),
and then remove
the
lock
nut
(8).
6.
Remove
the taper roller bearings
(6).
(When reassembling)
•
Replace
the lock
nut
(8)
with
new
ones.
• Apply grease
to
the
a-ring
of
front
axle
case
bosses.
• Install the
shims
and collars
tp
their
original position.
• Apply gear oil
to
the taper roller bearings (6) and install
them correctly, noting
their
direction.
• Stake the lock
nut
(8)
firmly.
(1)
FrontAxle
Case
(2)
Differential Gear Assembly
(3)
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
(4) Adjusting Collar
(5) Internal
Snap
Ring
(6) Taper Roller Bearings
B177F606
B177F607
(1)
Collar
(8)
External Snap
Ring
(2)
Differential
Case
(9)
Screws
(3)
Thrust Collar
(10)
Pinion Shaft
(4)
Differential
Pinion
(11
)
Shim
(5)
Differential
Case
(12)
Differential
Side
Cover Gear
(6)
Ball Bearing
(13)
Straight
Pin
(7)
Spiral Bevel Gear
Differential Gear
1.
Remove
the differential
case
cover mounting screws
(9)
and
then take
out
the differential
case
cover (5), ball bearing
(6)
and spiral bevel gear
(7)
as
a unit.
2.
Remove
the external snap ring (8), and then remove
the
ball
bearing
(G)
and spiral bevel gear
(7)
as
a
unit
with
a puller.
3.
Remove
the straight pin
(13).
4.
Pull
out
the pinion shaft
(10)
and take
out
the
differential
pinions
(4)
and differential side gears (12).
II
NOTE
• Arrange the parts
to
know
their
original position.
(When reassembling)
•
Apply
molybdenum
disulfide
(Three
Bond
1901
or
equivalent)
to
the
inner
circumferential
surface
of
the
differential side gears
(12)
and differential pinions
(4).
• Install the pinion shaft
(10)
so
that
the hole on
it
may align
with
the hole on differential
case
(2),
and install the straight
pin (13).
Differential
case
cover
29.4
to
34.3
N'm
Tightening
torque
mounting screw
3.0
to
3.5
kgf'm
21.7
to
25.3
ft-Ibs
6-59
6
FRONT
AXLE
SERVICING
8177P192
81700'82100·82400 WSM,11770
Clearance between'Differential
Case
(Differential
Case
Cover)
and Differential
Side
Gear
1.
Measure the differential
side
gear
boss
0.0.
2.
Measure the differential
case
bore 1.0. and calculate
the
clearance.
3. Measure the differential
case
cover bore 1.0. and calculate
the clearance.
4.
If
the clearance
exceeds
the allowable limit, replace
faulty
parts.
Clearance between
Factory
spec.
0.040
to
0.082 mm
differential
case
0.00157
to
0.00323 in.
(Differential
case
cover) and
Allowable
limit
0.17mm
differential
side gear 0.0067 in.
Differential
case
bore
Factory
spec.
26.000
to
26.021
mm
1.0.
1.02362
to
1.02445 in.
Differential
case
cover
Factory
spec.
26.000
to
26.021 mm
bore 1.0. 1.02362
to
1.02445 in.
Differential side gear
Factory
spec.
25.939
to
25.960 mm
0.0.
1.02122to 1.02205 in.
C094P106
•
Clearance between Pinion Shaft and Differential Pinion
1.
Measure the pinion shaft
0.0.
2. Measure
the
differential
pinion
1.0. and
calculate
the
clearance.
3.
If
the clearance
exceeds
the allowable limit, replace
faulty
parts.
Factory
spec.
0.064toO.100mm
Clearance between
0.00252
to
0.00394 in.
pinion shaft and
differential
pinion
Allowable
limit
0.25 mm
0.0096 in.
Pinion shaft
0.0.
Factory
spec.
13.950to
13.968 mm
0.54921
to
0.54992 in.
Differential pinion
Factory
spec.
14.032
to
14.050 mm
1.0.
0.55244
to
0.55315 in.
Backlash between Differential Pinion and Differential Side
Gear
1.
Set
a dial gauge (lever type) on a tooth
of
the differential
pinion.
2.
Fix
the
differential
side gear and move
the
differential
pinion
to
measure the backlash.
3.
If
the measurement
exceeds
the factory specifications, adjust
with
the differential side gears
shims.
8acklash between
0.1
toO.3
mm
differential
pinion and
Factory
spec.
differential
side gear
O.004toO.012 in.
(Reference)
• Thickness
of
adjusting shims: .
0.8
mm
(0.031
in.)
1.2
mm (0.047 in.)
.
1.0
mm
(0.039 in.)
6-510
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770 6
FRONT
AXLE
Turning
Force
of
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
1.
Install the spiral bevel pinion shaft assembly
to
the
front
axle
case.
2.
Wind a string around the spiral bevel pinion shaft and attach
spring balance
to
the
tip
ofthe
string.
3.
Slowly pull the spring balance in a direction
at
right
angle
to
the spiral bevel pinion shaft
to
measure
the
turning
force.
4.
If
the turning force
is
not
within
the factory specifications,
adjust
with
the lock nut.
127.5to
166.7 N
Turning force
Factory:>pec.
13
to
17
kgf
28.7
to
37.51bs
•
NOTE
..
The
turning
torque
is
figured
by
multiplying
the
radius
(distance from the center
of
the spiral bevel pinion shaft
to
a
point on the circumference from which the string
is
pulled)
by the reading on the spring balance.
•
After
turning force adjustment,
be
sure
to
stake
the
lock nut.
Backlash between Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft and Spiral Bevel
Gear
1.
Set
a dial gauge (lever type)
with
its finger on
the
spline
of
spiral bevel pinion shaft.
2.
Measure the backlash
by
moving the spiral bevel pinion shaft
by
hand lightly.
3.
If
the
backlash
is
not
within
the
factory
specifications,
change the adjusting collars
(3),
(4).
For
example change
the
adjusting collar
(4)
to
0.1
mm
(0.004 in.) smaller size, and
change the adjusting collar
(3)
to
0.1
mm
(0.004 in.) larger
size.
4.
Adjust
the
backlash
properly
by
repeating
the
above
procedu
res.
Backlash between
s~iral
bevel pinion
Factory
spec.
0.1
toO.3 mm
s
aft
and spiral bevel
0.004toO.012 in.
gear
(Reference)
.. Above factory specification should
be
measured on
the
tooth
of
spiral bevel pinion. When measuring
the
backlash on
the
spline
of
its shaft, factory specification
will
be
0.0571
to
0.1714
mm
(0.00225
to
0.00675 in.).
.. Thickness
of
adjusting collars
(3),
(4)
:
3.4mm(0.134in.)
4.1
mm(0.161 in.)
3.6
mm
(0.142 in.)
4.2
mm
(0.165 in.)
3.8
mm
(0.150 in.) 4.4
mm
(0.173 in.)
4.0
mm
(0.157 in.)
4.6
mm
(0.181
in.)
B177F608
(1)
Spiral Bevel Gear
(2)
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
(3)
Adjusting Collar
(4)
Adjusting Collar
6-S
11
6
FRONT
AXLE
(1)
16TBeveiGear
(2)
11T Bevel Gear
B177F608
(3) Shim
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
Backlash between 11T Bevel Gear and 16T Bevel Gear
1.
Stick a strip
of
fuse
to
three spots on
the
16T
bevel gear
(1)
with
grease.
2.
Fix
the
front
axle
case,
bevel gear
case
and
front
gear
case.
3.
Turn the axle.
4.
Remove
the
bevel gear
case
from
front
axle
case and
measure
the
thickness
of
the
fuses
with
an
outside
micrometer.
5.
If
the
backlash
is
not
within
the factory specifications, adjust
with
shim
(3).
Backlash
between
11T
0.10toO.30mm
bevel gear and 16T
Factory
spec.
bevel
gear
0.0039
to
0.0118 in.
(Reference)
• Thickness
of
adjusting
shims
(3)
:
0.8 mm
(0.031
in.)
1.2
mm
(0.047 in.)
1.0
mm (0.039 in.)
1.4
mm
(0.055 in.)
• Tooth
contact:
More than
35
%
Outside Diameter
of
Front Axle
Case
Bosses
and Inside
Diameter
of
Front Axle Bracket
1.
Measure the
front
axle
case
bosses
0.0.
with
an outside
micrometer.
2.
Measure the
front
axle bracket 1.0.
with
a cylinder gauge.
(Reference)
Front axle
case
boss
Factory spec.
49.920
to
49.945 mm
(front)
0.0.
1.96535
to
1.96634 in.
Front axle bracket
Factory spec.
50.150
to
50.200 mm
(front)
1.0.
1.97441
to
1.97638 in.
Front axle
case
boss
Factory
spec.
64.910
to
64.940 mm
(rear)
0.0.
2.55551
to
2.55669 in.
Front axle bracket
Factory spec.
65.150
to
65.200 mm
(rear)
1.0.
2.56496
to
2.56693 in.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease
to
the O-ring
(1)
and take care
not
to
damage
it.
•
After
mounting the
front
axle
assy
to
the
front
axle frame,
be
sure
to
adjust the
front
axle
roc,~ing
force
(See
page
6-54).
(1)
a-ring
6-512
MECHANISM·
.
CONTENTS
[1] HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
FOR
POWER
STEERING
SYSTEM 7-M1
[2] POWER
STEERING
BODY 7-M2
[3] OIL FLOW 7-M3
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
7
STEERING
[1] HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
FOR
POWER STEERING SYSTEM
10
r
[
22£/min
]
5.7 U.S.GPM
8
11
4.8 Imp.GPM
[
5£/min
]
1.3 U.S.GPM
1.1Imp.GPM
~
©
®
[
17£/min
]
4.4 U.S.GPM
3.7Imp.GPM
B177F701
(B)
To
Transmission (Manual Transmission Type Only)
(A)
To
Oil Cooler
(HST
Type Only)
(1)
Sector Gear Shaft
(2)
Balls
(3)
Ball
Nut
(4) Worm Shaft
(5)
Sliding Valve
(6) Relief Valve
(7)
Steering Wheel
(8)
Flow Priority Valve
(9)
Hydraulic Block Type
Outlet
(C)
To
Control Valve
(10) Pump
(11) Transmission
Case
All
models are
available
to
be
equipped
with
integral
type
power
steering
that
of
sliding
valve
with
centering spring type.
Flow
priority
valve
(8)
divides
the
oil
fed
to
hydraulic block
type
outlet
(9)
into
two
directions.
One
is
the
control
flow
to
power
steering
(constantly
5 t'lmin., 1.3 U.S.GPM, 1.1 Imp.GPM
at
any
engine
speed). And
the
other
is
excessive
flow
to
control
valve.
The mechanical gear section
shown
in
the.
next
page operates
in
the
same
way
as
ordinary manual
steering systems. However,
with
power
steering,
the
worm
shaft (4)
is
supported
only
by
the
centering
springs (13).
When
the
worm
thrust force (turning force
of
the
ball screw section) exceeds centering spring setting
load, the
worm
shaft
(4)
axially shifts by a specified
displacement (Stroke:
about
0.4 mm (0.016 in.) ).
When a load
is
applied
to
tires
and.
worm
thrust
force
required
for
operation
is
greater than
the
centering
spring setting load,
turning
the steering wheel does
not
rotate
the
sector gear shaft (1),
but
rather axially
moves
the
worm
shaft
(4).
The valve spool (19), fixed
on
the
worm
shaft
(4)
by
the
nut
(21), changes
the
condition
of
the
three-position,
four-way
open
center (all ports open) valve
(5)
by sliding in
the
valve
housing (20),
to
generate pressure
as
required.
7-M1
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,
11770
[3]
OIL
FLOW
• Neutral Position
[=:J
Low
Pressure
B177F703
7
STEERING
@@
(A)
From Pump
(Through
Flow
+
+
Priority
Valve)
I
(B)
To
HST
Unit
(HST Type)
or
5
Transmission
Case
(Manual
Transmission Type)
(1
)
Sector Gear
Shaft
(2)
Ball
Nut
(3)
Worm
Shaft
(4)
Reaction Pistons
(5)
Centering
Spring
(6)
Valve Housing
(7)
Spool
When
the
steering wheel
is
not
turned, the valve
is
placed in
the
neutral
position
by
the
centering
springs
(5)
and pressurized reaction pistons
(4).
Therefore,
there
is
no
difference
betwee,n
• Left Turning
pressures
on the right and
left
cylinder chambers.
And the ball
nut
(2)
and sector gear shaft
(1)
do
not
move.
So,
the
front
wheels keep
the
direction.
©©
High
Pressure
[=:J
Low
Pressure
B177F704
10
(1
)
Sector Gear
Shaft
(2)
Ball
Nut
(3)
Worm
Shaft
(4)
Thrust
Race
(5)
Reaction Piston
(6)
Centering
Spring
(7)
Valve Housing
(8)
Spool
(9)
Ball
(10)
Relief Valve
(A)
Chamber
"A"
(B)
Chamber
"B"
(C)
From Pump
(0)
To
HST
Unit
or
Transmission Case
(a)
Port
"a"
(b)
Port
"b"
1.
When
the
steering
wheel
is
turned
counterclockwise,
the
worm
shaft
(3)
is
also
turned.
However,
front
wheel load stops sectors gear
shaft
(1)
and ball
nut
(piston)
(2)
from moving,
and only
worm
shaft
(3)
turns counterclockwise.
Then, due
to
the
reaction,
the
worm
shaft
(3)
moves upward a little. And
the
thrust race (4)
pushes
the
spool (8), reaction
piston
(5) and
centering springs
(6).
2.
At
this time,
the
oil
passage
from pump
to
port
"b"
and oil
passage
from
port
"a"
are closed.
Therefore, the pressure-fed oil from pump
flows
to
the
chamber
"A"
through port
"a".
Thus,
the
ball
nut
(piston)
(2)
is
pushed, and the sector gear
shaft
(5)
is
rotated in the direction
of
the arrow.
7-M3
7
STEERING
II
Right Turning
High Pressure
I=:::J
Low
Pressure
B177F705
1.
When the steering wheel
is
turned clockwise, the
worm shaft (3)
is
also turned. However,
front
wheel load stops sector gear shaft (1) and ball
nut
(2)
from moving, and only worm shaft (3) turns
clockwise.
Then due
to
the
reaction,
the
worm
shaft
(3)
moves downward a little. And
the
thrust
race
(8)
pushes
the
spool (7),
reaction
piston
(5) and
centering springs (4).
II
Manual Operation
(When Engine Stops
or
Hydraulic Circuit Troubles)
Even
when
the
engine stops or hydraulic circuit
malfunctions thus
leading
to
hydraulic
operation
stop,
manual
operation
is
possible.
However,
naturally, steering wheel requires a larger operating
power.
If
the steering
wheel
is
turned
when hydraulic
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
(1
)
Sector Gear
Shaft
(2)
Ball
Nut
(3)
Worm
Shaft
(4)
Centering
Spring
(5)
Reaction Piston
(6)
Valve Housing
(7)
Spool
(8)
Thrust
Race
(9)
Ball
(10)
Relief Valve
(A)
Chamber
"A"
(B)
Chamber
"B"
(a)
Port"
a"
(b)
Port
"b"
7
2.
At
this time, the oil
passage
from pump
to
port
"a"
and oil
passage
from port
"b"
to
are closed.
Therefore, the pressure-fed oil from pump
flows
to
the chamber
"B"
through
port"b".
Thus,
the
ball
nut
(piston)
(2)
is
pushed, and
the
sector gear
shaft
(1)
is
rotated in the direction
ofthe
arrow.
circuit
ceases
to
operate, the worm shaft
(3)
moves
slightly
by
the stroke
of
spool (7),
then
the
worm
shaft
(3)
and ball
nut
(2)
have the
same
relationship
with
the
manual steering gear.
However,
the
steering wheel play increases
by
the
stroke
of
spool
(7).
7-M4
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
II
Operation
of
Relief Valve
B177F706
7
STEERING
High
Pressure
(1)
Adjusting Screw
(2) Spring
(3)
Poppet
(4) Valve Housing
This
power
steeri
ng is
eq
ui
pped
with
a
direct-acting
relief
valve
to
restrict
the
maximum
pressure in
the
hydraulic
circuit
and
to
prevent
breakage
of
the hydraulic equipment.
When
the
pressure in the hydraulic circuit
exceeds
the relief valve setting pressure in
such
a
case
that
the maximum steering angle
of
the
front
wheels
is
reached or road resistance
to
the
front
tires
is
too
great, the spring
(2)
is
compressed
to
generate a gap
between the poppet
(3)
and
the valve housing (4).
The
pressure-fed oil flows
to
tank
port
through the
gap
so
that
pressure
rise
is
restricted.
The
relief valve setting pressure
can
be
adjusted by
turning the adjusting screw
(1).
7-MS
SGRVICING
"
CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING 7-51
SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS 7-52
TIGHTENING TORQUES 7-53
CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING
AND
SERVICING .7-54
CHECKING 7-54
[1]
SEPARATING POWER STEERING BODY 7-55
[2]
POWER STEERING BODY 7-57
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING 7-57
SERVICING 7-511
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11770
TROUBLESHOOTING
7
STEERING
Symptom
Probable
Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Excessive Steering
• Backlash between sector gear shaft and ball
Adjust
7-S13
Wheel Play
nut
too
large
•
Steering linkage
worn
Replace
-
•
Sector gear shaft
worn
Replace
7-S9
Tractor Pulls
to
•
Tire pressure uneven
Adjust
G-36
Right
or
Left
•
Steering wheel play
too
small Adjust
7-S13
..
Improper toe-in adjustment Adjust
6-S3
Front Wheels
•
Steering linkage
worn
Replace
-
Vibration
•
Impropertoe-in adjustment Adjust
6-S3
Hard Steering
•
Transmission
fluid
improper
or
insufficient Change
G-8
•
Oil leak
from
pipe
joint
Retighten
-
•
Hydraulic pump malfunctioning Replace
8-S6
..
Relief valve malfunctioning
Replace
7-S8
..
Seals
in
the
steering gear box damaged
Replace
-
..
Backlash between sector gear shaft and ball Adjust
7-S13
nut
too
small
..
Air
in the hydraulic pipes
Airvent
-
•
Low operating pressure Refer
to
next item
-
Low
Operating
..
Hydraulic pump malfunctioning Replace
8-S6
Pressure
..
Improper relief valve adjustment Adjust
7-S4,
S8
..
Control valve malfunctioning
Replace
7-S8
•
Seals
in
the
steering gear box damaged Replace
-
..
Ball
nut
malfunctioning Replace ball
nut
7-S
11
assembly
.. Oil leak
from
pipe
or
pipe broken Replace
-
Steering Wheel
• Control valve malfunctioning
Replace
7-S8
Does
Not
Return
to
Neutral Position
• Valve Spool and valve housing jammed
Repair
or
Replace
7-S8
• Valve housing oil
seal
damaged
Replace
-
lID
Centering spring weaken
or
broken
Replace
7-S8
Steering Force
•
Insufficient oil
Replenish
G-8
Fluctuates
•
Insufficient bleeding
Bleed
-
•
Control valve malfunctioning
Replace
7-S8
Noise
•
Insufficient oil
Replenish
G-8
..
Air
sucked in pump
from
suction circuit
Repair
-
..
Pi
pe deformed
Replace
-
7-S1
7
STEERING
SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
Item
Factory Specification
Allowable
Limit
Steering Wheel
Play
5.0
to
30.0 mm
0.2
to
1.2 in.
-
Operation Force
Less
than
49 N
Condition:
5.0 kgf.
• Engine Speed
-
Approx. 2600 rpm
11
Ibs.
Relief Valve Setting Pressure
11.28to
11.77
MPa
-
Condition:
115
to
120
kgf/cm
2
• Engine Speed:
1636
to
1707
psi
Approx. 2600 rpm
• Oil Temperature:
45
to
55°C
113
to
131°F
Steering Gear
Boxto
Ball
Nut
Clearance 0.035
to
0.079 mm 0.15
mm
0.00138
to
0.00311 in.
0.0059 in.
Gear Box Bore I.D.
56.005
to
56.030 mm
-
2.20492
too
2.20591 in.
Ball
Nut
O.D. 55.951
to
55.970 mm
-
2.20280
to
2.20354 in.
Bull
Nut
Assembly Axial Play
OtoO.12 mm
0.100mm
o
to
0.0047 in. 0.00394 in.
Valve Housing
to
Spool Clearance
0.005
to
0.015 mm
0.025 mm
0.00020
to
0.00059 in.
0.00098 in.
Spool O.D.
24.995
to
25.000 mm
-
0.98406
to
0.98425 in.
Valve housing I.D.
25.005
to
25.010 mm
-
0.98445
to
0.98465 in.
Valve housing
to
Piston Clearance
0.005
to
0.030 mm
0.06mm
0.00020
to
0.00118 in.
0.0024 in.
Piston
O.D.
9.990
to
10.005 mm
-
0.39331
to
0.39390 in.
Valve housing
I.D.
10.010to
10.020mm
-
0.39409
to
0.39449 in.
Sector Gear Shaft
to
Side Cover Clearance
0.005
to
0.034 mm
0.1
mm
0.00020
to
0.00206 in.
0.0039 in.
Sector Gear Shaft
O.D.
27.987
to
28.000 mm
1.10185to 1.10236in.
Side Cover Side
I.D.
28.005
to
28.021 mm
1.10256to 1.10319 in.
7-S2
61700·62100·62400 WSM,11770
(Continued)
7
STEERING
Item
Factory Specification
Allowable
Limit
Sector Gear Shaft
to
Steering
Clearance 0.040
to
0.074 mm 0.20 mm
Gear Box
0.00158toO.00291 in.
0.0078 in.
Sector Gear Shaft
0.0.
27.987
to
28.000 mm
-
1.10185
to
1.10236 in.
Steering Gear Box
1.0.
28.040
to
28.061
mm
-
1.10394to 1.10476in.
Sector Gear Shaft
to
Ball Nut
Backlash
Deflection
Less
than 0.30 mm
-
measured
at
0.0118 in.
piston arm
end
Worm
Shaft
Turning Torque
Less
than 0.78 N·m
-
0.08 kgf·m
0.58 ft-Ibs.
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torques
of
screws and nuts on
the
table
below
are especially specified.
(For general
use
screws and nuts:
See
page
G-8)
Item
N'm
kgf'm
ft·lbs
Drag
link
end slotted
nut
17.7t034.3
1.8t03.5
13.0to
25.3
Tie rod lock
nut
29.4to
34.3
3.0
to
3.5
21.7
to
25.3
Pitman arm
mounting
nut
147.1
to
176.5
15.0t018.0
108.5
to
130.2
Power steering assembly
mounting
screw
77.5
to
90.2
7.9t09.2
57.1
to
66.5
Power steering delivery and return pipe end flare
nut
29.4
to
39.2
3.0t04.0
21.7t028.9
Steering wheel
mounting
nut
29.4
to
49.0
3.0to
5.0 21.7
to
36.2
Top cover
mounting
nut
24.5
to
28.5
2.5to
2.9
18.1
to21.0
Side cover
mounting
screw
23.5
to
27.5
2.4to
2.8
17.4to
20.3
7-S3
7
STEERING
CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING
AND
SERVICING
CHECKING
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
_IMPORTANT
•
Use
only
the
transmission
fluid
(See
page
S.G-3),
in no
case
use
mixture
of
oils
of
different
brands.
• Do
not
disassemble
the
hydraulic pump and
power
steering needlessly.
•
After
installing
or
reassembling the
power
steering hydraulic components,
be
sure
to
bleed air.
(Bleeding)
• Start
the
engine,
then
turn
the steering wheel slowly in both directions all the way alternately several times,
and stop
the
engine.
Steering Wheel Play
1.
Refer
to
the backlash between sector gear shaft and ball
nut
on page
7-S13.
Power steering wheel play
Reference
value
5.0
to
30.0 mm
0.2
to
1.2
in.
B177P196
Condition
• Engine speed Approx.
2600 rpm
• Oil temperature
45
to
55
°c
113
to
131
of
• Tractor by itself
(without
any implement and weight)
B177F707
Steering Wheel Operating
Force
1.
Park the tractor on
flat
concrete place.
2. Start the engine.
After
warming up, set the engine speed
at
approx.
2600
rpm.
3.
S'et
a spring balance
to
the steering wheel
to
measure the
operating force.
4.
If
the measurement
exceeds
the factory specification, check
the
suction line, delivery line, and
the
performance
of
hydraulic pump.
And then, check the power steering assembly.
49N
Steering
wheel
operating force Factory
spec.
Less
than
5.0
kgf
11
Ibs
Relief Valve Setting Pressure
1.
Remove
the
panel board, bonnet rear cover and
right
side
cover
to
remove the power steering delivery pipe (2).
2.
Remove
the power steering delivery pipe (2).
3.
Install the pressure
gal;Jge
(5)
to
another
power
steering
delivery pipe
(2), and conrect
it
to
the original position.
4. Start the engine.
After
warming up, set
the
engine speed
at
approx. 2600 rpm.
5.
Fully
turn
the steering wheel
to
the
left
or
right
end
to
read
the relief pressure.
After
reading, stop the engine.
6.
If
the pressure
is
not
factory specification, check the pump
delivery line and adjust
the
relief
valve
setting
pressure
(Refer
to
7-S8).
Power steering relief valve
11.28
to
11.77 MPa
setting pressure
Factory spec.
115
to
120 kgf/cm
2
1636
to
1707
psi
(1) Power Steering
Valve
(2) Delivery Pipe
(3) Return Pipe
(4) Hydraulic Pump
(5) Pressure Gauge
7-S4
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM, 11770
7
STEERING
[1]
SEPARATING
POWER
STEERING
BODY
(1)
Battery Cord
(2) Battery
Hood and Side Cover
1.
Open the hood
(1)
from
the
front
and remove the spring lock
pin and remove hood
with
hood rod
for
keeping
it
open.
2.
Remove
the
front
grille (4).
3.
Remove
the right and
left
side cover (2), (3).
Battery
1.
Disconnect the battery cords (1) and dismount the
battery
(2).
III
NOTE
• When disconnecting
the
battery
cords,
disconnect
the
grounding cord first. When connecting, connect the positive
cord first.
(3)
Side
Cover
LH
(4)
Front Grille
(1) Hood
(2)
Side
Cover
RH
Steering wheel
29.4
to
49.0 N'm
Tightening torque
3.0
to
5.0
kgf'm
mounting
nut
21.7
to
36.2
ft-Ibs
Steering Wheel
1.
Remove
the steering wheel
cap.
2.
Remove
the steering wheel mounting
nut
and remove
the
steering wheel
with
a steering wheel puller. (Code No :
07916-51090)
(When reassembling)
Meter
Panel
and
Panel
Under Cover
1.
Remove
the meter panel
(2)
and disconnect the meter panel
connector (3) and
hour-meter
cable (7)
from
the
meter
panel. Then remove the meter panel.
2.
Tap
out
the spring pin and remove the hand accelerator lever
(1
).
3.
Disconnect the combination switch connector
(4)
and main
switch connector
(5).
4.
Remove
the panel under cover
(6).
(5)
Main Swithch Connector
(6)
Panel Under Cover
(7)
Hour-meter Cable
(1)
Hand Accelerator Lever
(2)
Meter
Panel
(3)
Meter
Panal
Connector
(4)
Combination Switch Connector
7-S5
7
STEERING
B
1700·B21
00'B2400 WSM, 11770
Fuel
Tank
1.
Disconnect the fuel
hose
between fuel
filter
and fuel
tank
at
the fuel
filter
side, then drain fuel completely.
2.
Remove
the fuel tank frame stay
(1).
3.
Disconnect the regulator and hazard
unit
connectors, and
remove the lead
wire
for
fuel gauge.
4.
Disconnect the fuse box (4).
5.
Dismount the overflow
hoses
(5)
of
fuel line.
6.
Remove
the tank flame
(2)
with
fuel
tank
(3).
(1)
Fuel
Tank Frame Stay
(2)
Fuel
Tank Frame
(3)
Fuel
Tank
(4)
Fuse
Box
(5) Overflow
Hose
17.7to34.3
N'm
Slotted
nut
1.8
to
3.5
kgf·m
13.0
to
25.3
ft-Ibs
Tightening torque
Pitman arm mounting
147.1
to
176.5 N'm
15.0to
18.0 kgf'm
nut
108.5
to
130.2 ft-Ibs
Step
1.
Remove
the lowering
speed
adjusting knob
(3).
2.
Remove
the seat under cover (1).
3.
Remove
the rubber mat
(2).
4.
Remove
the clutch spring and
left
hand step
(4).
(1)
Seat Under Cover (3) Lowering Speed Adjusting Knob
(2) Rubber
Mat
(4)
Step
(LH)
Drag Link and Pitman Arm
1.
Remove
the slotted
nut
and disconnect the drag
link
(2)
from
the pitman arm
(1).
2.
Remove
the
pitman
arm
mounting
nut
and remove
the
pitman arm
with
pitman arm puller (Code
No.
07909-39011).
(When reassembling)
III IMPORTANT
•
After
tightening the
slotted
nut
to
the
specified
torque,
install the cotter pin
as
shown in the figure.
• Install the pitman arm
to
the sector gear shaft
so
that
their
marks align.
(2)
Drag Link
(1) Pitman Arm
7-S6
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
B177P069
(1)
Power Steering Delivery Pipe
(2)
Power Steering Return Pipe
(3)
Power Steering
Assem
bly
7
STEERING
Power Steering Assembly
1.
Remove
the
power steering delivery pipe
(1)
and return pipe
(2).
2.
Disconnect
the
speed set rod
(HST
type) and parking brake
rod.
3.
Remove
the
power steering assembly (3)
from
the
center
frame.
(When reassembling)
Flare
nut
29.4
to
39.2 N'm
(PS
delivery, return pipe)
3.0
to
4.0
kgf'm
Tightening
torque
21.7
to
28.9 ft-Ibs
Power steering assembly
77.5to90.1 N'm
7.9to9.2
kgf'm
mounting screw
57.2
to
66.5 ft-Ibs
[2] POWER
STEERING
BODY
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING
Steering column
23.5
to
27.5 N'm
2.4
to
2.8
kgf'm
mounting
nut
17.4
to
20.3 ft-Ibs
Tightening
torque
23.5
to
27.5 N'm
Top cover mounting
nut
2.4
to
2.8
kgf'm
17.4
to
20.3 ft-Ibs
Steering Column and Top Cover
1.
Secure
the
steering assembly in a
vise.
2.
Turn
the
steering shaft several times
to
drain oil.
3.
Loosen
the
steering column mounting
nut
(1), and remove
the
steering column
with
steering shaft and universal
joint
(2).
4.
Remove
the
external snap ring
(4)
and
nut
which secure
the
top
cover (3), and remove
the
top
cover (3).
(When reassembling)
B177P198
B177P199
(1)
Steering Column Mounting Nut
(2)
Universal Joint
7-S7
(3)
Top Cover
(4)
External
Snap
Ring
7
STEERING
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
Valve Assembly
1.
Install the four
top
cover mounting nuts
to
the
stud
bolt
temporaly
by
hand.
2.
Remove
the stake
of
nut
(1),
then remove it.
3.
Remove
the valve assembly.
Set
the worm shaft horizontally
to
remove
each
part easily.
(When reassembling)
11IIII
IMPORTANT
lit Lightly tighten the
nut
(1) by hand, and
while
holding the
worm shaft (9), tighten
with
a wrench.
After
tightening,
loosen the
nut
approx. 0.17 rad. (10°), and stake
the
nut
(1)
with
a pin punch.
11IIII
IMPORTANT
lit
Do
not disassemble the relief valve needlessly, since
it
has
been factory-adjusted.
1.
Remove
the centering springs
(2)
and reaction pistons
(3).
2.
Remove
the
spool (1) and remember
the
direction
of
it
against valve housing
(4).
3.
Remove
the relief valve
if
needed.
(When reassembling)
lit Apply grease
to
seals
in the valve.
11IIII
IMPORTANT
•
If
the relief valve
is
disassembled, replace
the
adjusting
screw
with
new
one, and
after
reassembly,
be
sure
to
adjust
the setting pressure, then stake the adjusting screw
with
a
punch.
.. When
the
valve housing (4)
or
spool (1) are
damaged,
replace them
as
a unit.
B177P200
B177F708
(1) Spool
(2) Centering Spring
(3) Reaction Pistons
(4) Valve Housing
(5) Relief Valve Poppet
(6) Relief Spring
(7) O-ring
(8) Adjusting Screw
(1) Nut
(2) Thrust
Race
(3) Thrust Needle Bearing
(4) Thrust
Race
(5) Valve Housing
Disassembling Valve Housing
(6) Thrust
Race
(7) Thrust Needle Bearing
(8)
Th
rust
Race
(9) Worm Shaft
Power steering relief
11.28
to
11.77
MPa
Factory spec.
115
to
120 kgf/cm
2
va
Ive setti
ng
pressu
re
1636
to
1707
psi
7-58
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770 7
STEERING
Side Cover
1.
Remove
the lock
nut
(2) on the adjusting screw.
2.
Remove
the side cover mounting
screws.
3. Turn the adjusting screw (3) clockwise
to
remove
the
side
cover
(1).
(When reassembling)
.. Apply grease
to
the O-ring.
.. Apply grease
to
the
ring groove, before mounting
the
U-seal
on
it
.
.. Direct the
lip
of
U-seal
inward,
as
shown in
the
figure.
..
Replace
the lock
nut
with
a new one, and
after
adjusting the
backlash between sector gear
.and
ball nut, be sure
to
stake
the
adjusting screw and lock
nut
with
a punch.
48.1
to
55.9 N'm
Lock
nut
4.9
to
5.7
kgf'm
35.4to
41.2 ft-Ibs
Tightening
torque
37.3
to
56.9 N'm
Side
cover mounting
3.8
to
5.8
kgf'm
screw
27.5
to
42.0 ft-Ibs
(1)
Side Cover
(2)
Lock
Nut
(3)
Adjusting Screw
(4)
U-Seal
Sector Gear Shaft
1.
Tap
out
the sector gear shaft (1) toward
the
side cover
while
holding another end
to
avoid dropping.
(When reassembling)
.. Turn the worm shaft (2)
so
that
the ball
nut
(3)
is
centered in
its travel.
Then, install the sector gear shaft
(1)
so
that
the
center
of
its
teeth engages the center
of
the teeth
of
the
ball
nut
(3).
II
NOTE
.. When setting the sector gear
shaft
(1),
take
care
not
to
damage the oil seal and U-seal in the gear box.
(1) Sector Gear Shaft
(2) Worm Shaft
(3) Ball Nut
7-59
7
STEERING
B1700·B21 00'B2400 WSM, 11770
Adjuster
of
Sector Gear Shaft
1.
Remove
the
stake and adjuster (2).
(1)
Adjusting
Screw
(2)
Adjuster
(3) Sector Gear
Shaft
B177F711
(2) End Cover
(When reassembling)
..
Apply
grease
to
the
head
of
adjuster.
Snap Ring
1.
Remove
the
snap ring (1) which retains
the
end cover (2).
(When reassembling)
III
NOTE
.. Direct
the
blunt
edge side
of
the
snap ring (1)
to
the
end
cover (2).
End
Cover and Ball
Nut
Assembly
1.
Tap
out
the
worm
shaft (1)
toward
the
end cover (3)
to
remove it.
2.
Remove
the
ball
nut
(2)
and
worm
shaft
(1)
(ball
nut
assembly)
as
a unit.
III
NOTE
.. When
drawing
out
the
ball
nut
assembly,
take
care
not
to
damage
the
seal rings
on
the
ball
nut
(2) and
ball
nut
surface.
.. Never disassemble
the
ball
nut
assembly.
(3)
End
Cover
(3)
a-ring
(1) U-seal
(2) Snap Ring
(1)
Worm
Shaft
(2) Ball
Nut
Seal
Rings on
End
Cover
1.
Remove
the
U-seal (1) and
a-ring
(3).
(When reassembling)
.. Replace
the
U-seal (1) and
a-ring
(3)
with
new
ones.
..
Apply
grease
to
the
a-ring
(3) and
U-seal
(1).
.. Before setting them inside
of
the
end cover and on
it,
apply
grease
to
the
ri
ng grooves.
B177F712
7-510
81700·82100·B2400 WSM,11770
7
STEERING
Bl77P209
Seal
Ring on Ball Nut
1.
Cut the
seal
ri
ng
with
a knife and remove it.
2.
Remove
the O-ring inside the teflon ring.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease
to
the ring groove.
•
Replace
the
seal
rings
with
new
ones.
• Stretch the
teflon
ring by hand, install
it
on
the
ball nut, and
press
it
so
that
it
is
restored
to
its original form.
(1)
Ball
Nut
(1)
U-Seal
U-Seal
on Gear Box
1.
Remove
the
U-seal
(1)
with
a sharp tool.
(When reassembling)
•
Replace
the
U-seal
(1)
with
new
ones.
• Directthe
lip
ofthe
U-seal
(1)
inward.
CD
After
applying grease
to
the ring groove and
to
seals, set
them.
Seal
Rings
on Gear Box
1.
Remove
the
seal
ring
(1).
2.
Remove
the
seal
ring
(2).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease
to
the
ri
ng groove.
• Replace
the
seal
rings
(1)
(2)
with
new
ones.
• Change
the
shape
of
the
seal
ring
(1)
to
the heart figure by
fingers, install
it
on the gear box and
press
it
so
that
it
is
restored
to
its original form.
(2)
Seal
Ring
(1)
Seal
Ring
Bl77F715
SERVICING
Bl77P210
Clearance between Steering Gear Box and Ball Nut
1.
Measure the steering gear box cylinder
1.0.
with
a cylinder
gauge.
2.
Measure the ball
nut
0.0.
with
an
outside micrometer, and
calculate this clearance.
3.
If
the clearance exceeds
the
allowable
limit,
replace
the
steering gear box or ball
nut
assembly.
Factory
spec.
0.035
to
0.079 mm
Clearance between 0.001
to
0.00311 in.
steering gear box and
ball
nut
Allowable
limit
0.15
mm
0.0059 in.
Gear box bore
J.D.
Factory
spec.
56.005
to
56.030
mm
2.2049
to
2.20591 in.
Ball
nutO.D.
Factory
spec.
55.951
to
55.970 mm
2.20280
to
2.20354 in.
7-S
11
7
STEERING
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770
Axial Play
of
Ball
Nut
Assembly
1.
Secure
the
ball
nut
assembly in a
vise.
2.
Set
a dial indicator
with
its
finger
on
the
worm
shaft
of
the
ball
nut
assembly.
3.
Move
the
worm
shaft axially and measure
the
play.
4.
If
the
play exceeds the allowable
limit,
replace
the
ball
nut
assembly.
Factory spec.
OtoO.12 mm
Axial play
of
ball
nut
o
to
0.0047 in.
assembly
Allowable
limit
0.100 mm
0.00394 in.
Bl77P212
Clearance between Valve Housing and Spool
1.
Measure the valve housing
I.D.
with
a cylinder gauge and
the
spool
a.D.
with
an
outside micrometer, and calculate this
clearance.
2.
Ifthe
clearance exceeds
the
allowable
limit,
replace
the
spool
and valve housing
as
a unit.
II
IMPORTANT
.. Check
to
see
if
the
spool slides
smoothly
in
the
valve
housing.
Factory spec.
0.005
to
0.015 mm
Clearance
between
0.00020
to
0.00059 in.
valve housing and
spool
Allowable
limit
0.025 mm
0.00098 in.
Spool
a.D. Factory spec.
24.995
to
25.000 mm
0.98406
to
0.98425 in.
Valve housing
J.D.
Factory
spec.
25.005
to
25.010 mm
0.98445
to
0.98465 in.
Clearance between Valve Housing and Piston
1.
Measure the piston
a.D.
with
an outside
micrometer
and
valve housing
I.D.
with
an
inside micrometer, and calculate
this clearance.
2.
If
the
clearance exceeds
the
allowable
limit,
replace
the
defective parts.
Factory spec.
0.005
to
0.030 mm
Clearance between 0.00020
to
0.00118 in.
valve housing and
piston
Allowable
limit
0.06mm
0.0024 in.
Piston
a.D. Factory spec.
9.990
to
10.005 mm
0.39331
to
0.39390 in.
Valve housing
J.D.
Factory spec.
10.010to
10.020 mm
0.39409
to
0.39449 in.
7-512
81700'82100·82400 WSM,11770
7
STEERING
8177P214
(1) Section Gear Shaft
(2) Steering Gear 80x
(3) Side Cover
Clearance between Sector Gear Shaft and Side Cover
1.
Measure
the
sector
gear
shaft
O.
D.
with
an
outside
micrometer and side cover
I.D.
with
a cylinder gauge, and
calculate the clearance.
2.
If
the clearance exceeds
the
allowable
limit,
replace
the
defective parts.
Factory spec.
0.005
to
0.034 mm
Clearance between
0.00020
to
0.00206 in.
side cover and sector
gear shaft
Allowable
limit
0.1
mm
0.0039 in.
Sector gear shaft
0.0.
Factory spec.
27.987to
28.000 mm
1.10185to 1.10236 in.
Side cover
1.0. Factory
spec.
28.005
to
28.021 mm
1.10256to
1.10319 in.
Clearance between Sector Gear Shaft and Steering Gear Box
1.
Measure
the
sector
gear
shaft
O.
D.
with
an
outside
micrometer and steering gear box I.D.
with
a cylinder gauge,
and calculate the clearance.
2.
If
the clearance exceeds
the
allowable
limit,
replace
the
defective parts.
Factory spec.
0.040
to
0.074 mm
Clearance between
0.00158
to
0.00291 in.
sector gear shaft and
steering gear box
Allowable
limit
0.20 mm
0.0078 in.
Sector gear shaft
0.0.
Factory spec.
27.987to28.000
mm
1.10185
to
1.10236 in.
Steering gear box
1.0. Factory spec.
28.040
to
28.061 mm
1.10394to
1.10476 in.
Backlash between Sector Gear Shaft and Ball Nut
1.
Attach the pitman arm havi ng no play.
2.
Set
adial indicator
with
its finger on
the
pitman arm.
3.
Move the pitman arm lightly, and measure the deflection.
4.
If
the measurement
is
not
within
the
factory specification,
adjust the backlash
with
the adjusting screw.
8acklash between sector
0.30 mm
gear shaft and ball
nut
Factory
spec.
Less
than
0.0118 in.
Turning Torque
of
Worm Shaft
1.
Set
the torque wrench on the worm shaft and measure the
torque required
to
initial turning.
2.
If
the measurement
is
not
within
the factory specification,
disassemble the steering gear box.
Turning
torque
of
worm
0.78 N'm
Factory
spec.
Less
than 0.08
kgf'm
shaft
0.58 ft-Ibs
7-S13
\,
MECHANISM ,
CONTENTS
[1] HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT 8-M1
[2] HYDRAULIC PUMP 8-M3
[3] FLOW PRIORITY VALVE 8-M3
[4] POSITION CONTROL VALVE 8-M4
[5] FEEDBACK LINKAGE
FOR
POSITION CONTROL 8-MS
[6]
RELIEF
VALVE 8-M6
[7] HYDRAULIC CYLINDER 8-M7
[8] HYDRAULIC
BLOCK
TYPE
OUTLET 8-M8
[9]
REAR
HYDRAULIC OUTLET 8-M8
81700·82100·82400 WSM, 11770
[1] HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
II
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
5
8177F801
----I~~
Oil Flow
in
Neutral
State
8177F802
I I
~-~
8-M1
8
HYDRAU
Lie
SYSTEM
(1) Position Control Valve
(2)
Rear
Hydraulic
Outlet
(3)
Power Steering
(4)
Flow Priority Valve
(5)
Oil Strainer
(6)
Hydraulic
810ck
Type
Outlet
(7)
Hydraulic Pump
(8)
Hydraulic Cylinder
(9)
Lowering
Speed
Adjusting
Valve
(10) Relief Valve
8 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
B1700'B2100·B2400 WSM, 11770
• HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
(1)
Position Control valve
(2)
Oil Filter
(3)
Hydrostatic Transmission
(HST)
(4)
Power Steering
(5)
Flow Priority Valve
(6)
Oil Cooler
(7)
Rear
Hydraulic
Outlet
(8)
Oil Strainer
(9)
Hydraulic Block Type
Outlet
(10) Hydraulic
Pum
p
(11)
Hydraulic Cylinder
(12) Lowering
Speed
Adjusting
Valve
(13) Relief Valve
Bl77F803
10
5
:--------{
I
:~
I '
I _
lb
__
~~,
\-,
I I
r------------i
i i
I
_U
i
----x---
,
~.
--
.......
~
Oil FI9w in Neutral
State
Bl77F804
\
8-M2
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
• Hydraulic System
The
hydraulic
system
of
these
tractors
are
composed
of
a hydraulic pump, hydraulic block type
outlet, control valve, hydraulic cylinder, hydraulic oil
filter
and
other
components.
This
system
has
the
following
functions.
1.
Position control
of
the rear implement connected
to
the
3-poi
nt
hitch.
2.
Hydraulic power take
off
from
the
hydraulic block
type
outlet
to
operate the implements
such
as
a
front
loader,
front
blade and etc.
[2] HYDRAULIC PUMP
~
~-----
~
-
~~-
8
HYDRAU
Lie
SYSTEM
• Oil
is
supplied by a hydraulic pump connected
to
the engine. When
an
engine
is
started, a hydraulic
pump starts running,
sucks
oil from a transmission
case.
The
hydraulic pump forces
out
the
oil
to
power
steering,
hydraulic
block
type
outlet,
control valve, hydraulic cylinder and hydrostatic
transmission (only
for
HST).
Displacement Engine speed
Condition
22.01/min.
13.2to
13.7 MPa
5.8 U.S.GPM
At
2600 rpm
135to
140 kg/cm
2
4.8Imp.GPM
1920to
1991
psi
The
hydraulic pump
is
composed
of
the
casing (1),
cover
(3),
side plate (5), and
two
spur gears (drive
gear
(4) and driven gear
(2»
that
are in
mesh.
Hydraulic pump
is
driven
by
the fuel camshaft.
Maximum displacement
is
as
follows.
B177F805
4
5
(1) Casing
(2) Driven Gear
(3) Cover
(4) Drive Gear
(5) Side Plate
[3] FLOW PRIORITY VALVE
The
flow
priority
valve
is
a
flow
devider
that
devides
the
flow
from
single
hydraulic
source
(hydraulic pump)
to
actuates
two
circuits (position
control
circuit
and
power
steering
circuit)
simultaneously.
This
valve feeds fixedly controlled
flow
(5
II
min,
1.3
U.S.
GPM,
1.1
Imp.
GPM)
to
the
PF
port
with
priority and
excessive
flow
to
the
EF
port.
1
B177F806
t
P Port
3
(1) Spring
(2) Spool
(3) Valve Body
8-M3
II
Neutral
Oil forced
into
the
control valve
through
the
P
port
pushes open
the
unload
poppet
(4) and
then
returns
to
the
transmission
case
through
the
T1
port.
Oil behind
the
unload
poppet
(4) returns
to
the
transmission
case
through
the
spool
(3)
and
the
T3
port.
Since
the
poppet 2 (1) and
poppet
1
(2)
are closed,
oil in the hydraulic
cylinder
does
not
flow
to
the
transmission
case.
Thus,
the
implement
remains
at
its fixed position.
II
Lift
When
the
control lever
is
set
to
the
LIFT
position,
the spool
(3)
is
move
to
the
right.
The oil forced
into
the
control valve
through
the
P
port
flows
to
the
back
of
the
unload
poppet
(4)
to
close it.
The oil pushes open
the
poppet
1 (2), and flows
into
the
hydraulic cylinder
through
the
C
port
to
lift
the implement.
8 HYDRAU
L1C
SYSTEM
[4]
POSITION CONTROL VALVE
This position control valve
is
located under
the
hydraulic cylinder block.
,)0
P:
Pump Port
c:
Cylinder Port
(1)
Poppet 2
(2)
Poppet 1
3
B177F807
P:
Pump Port
C:
Cylinder Port
(1) Poppet 2
(2)
Poppet 1
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
Tl,
T2,
Ta: Tank Port
(3)
Spool
(4) Unload Poppet
Tl,
T2,
Ta
: Tank Port
(3) Spool
(4)
Unload Poppet
B177F808
3
4
8-M4
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
B177F809
8 HYDRAU
Lie
SYSTEM
II1II
Down
When
the
control
lever
is
moved
to
DOWN
position, the spool
(4)
is
move
to
the
left,
and the
poppet 2
(2)
is
also
move
to
the
left
by
the lever
(1).
Oil in the hydraulic cylinder.
is
forced
out
to
the
transmission
case
through the
T2
port
by
the
weight
ofthe
implement, causing the implement
to
lower.
Oil forced
into
the control valve
through
the
P
port
pushes
open the unload poppet
(5)
and returns
to
the transmission
case
through the
T1
port.
P:
Pump
Port
T1, T2,
T3:
Tank
Port
c:
Cylinder
Port
(1)
Lever
(4)
Spool
(2)
Poppet
2
(5)
Unload
Poppet
(3)
Poppet
1
[5]
FEEDBACK
LINKAGE
FOR
POSITION
CONTROL
B177F810
(1)
Lift
Arm
RH
(2) Feedback Rod
(3)
Control
Lever
Shaft
(4) Position
Control
Lever
(5) Feedback
Arm
(6) Feedback
Arm
Shaft
(7) Connecting Link
(8)
Control
Lever
Arm
(9) Lever
When
the
position control lever (4) moved
to
rearward
to
lift
the
implement,
the
spool
of
the
position control valve
is
pushed in
to
form a raising
circuit
by
the motions
of
control lever arm (8), control
lever shaft (3), connecting link
(7)
and the lever
(9).
And after the
lift
arm
(1)
moves upward, the spool
is
pulled
out
and return
to
form a neutral circuit
by
the
motions
of
feedback rod (2), feedback arm (5),
feedback arm shaft
(6),
connecting link
(7)
and the
lever
(9).
As
a result,the
implement
height
can
be easily
determined in proportion
to
the set position
of
the
position control lever
(4).
8-M5
8 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
[6]
RELIEF
VALVE
B177F811
13.2
to
13.7
MPa
135
to
140
kgf/cm
2
1920
to
1991
psi
Maximum
45to
55°C
113
to
131°F
Engine speed:
Oil temperature:
The
Three
point
hydraulic system circuit
has
a
relief valve
to
restrict the maximum
pressure
in the
circuit.
The
relief valve
is
located
top
of
the hydraulic
cylinder body.
The
relief valve
is
of
the guide piston type
with
damping effect.
Among direct acting
relief
valves,
this
type
is
suited
to
higher pressure and
has
large capacity.
Furthermore,
this
type
is
free
from
unstable
operation,
such
as
chattering, which occurs often in
directacting relief
valves.
As
shown in the figure, the guide
is
attached
to
the poppet
(5)
and a valve chamber
D.C.
(called the
damping chamber)
is
formed
at
the bottom
of
the
guide piston.
The
inlet
of
the
valve leads
to
the
chamber via a clearance between the sliding portion
of
the
guide and
the
seat (6),
minimizing
valve
vibration
with
the damping effect
of
the chamber.
When the oil
pressure
in the circuit
is
lower than
the setting pressure
of
the
relief
valve,
the
relief
valve
is
not operated and the oil fed
to
the
relief
valve
from
the
hydraulic
pump
flows
into
the
position control valve.
As
the oil
pressure
in the circuit
increases,
so
does
the
pressure
in the damping chamber
D.C.
When the
pressure
rises
above the valve setting and overcomes
the spring force, the valve
opens.
Oil then flows
out
to
the transmission
case
through T port, preventing
any further
rise
in pressure.
The
valve
closes
again
when enough oil
is
released
to
drop
pressure
below
the valve setting.
(Reference)
• Relief Valve setting pressure:
4
2 3
I
T Port I
(To Transmission Case)
I
I
I
+
To Position Control
Valve
[-
From Hydraulic _
Pump
From Hydraulic
Pump -
D.C.: Damping Chamber
P:
Pump
Port
(1) Plug
(2) Washer
(3)
Shim
C: Cylinder Port
T:
Tank Port
(4) Hydraulic Cylinder Body
(5) Poppet
(6) Seat
8-M6
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
[7] HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
8 HYDRAULie SYSTEM
11
B177FB12
(1)
Lowering Speed Adjusting Shaft
(2)
Lowering Speed Adjusting Valve
(3)
Hydraulic Cylinder
(4)
Relief Valve
(5)
Hydraulic Arm
(6)
Piston
(7)
a-ring
(8)
Back-up
Ring
(9)
Hydraulic
Rod
(10) Position Control Valve
(11) LiftArm
The
main components
of
the
hydraulic cylinder are
shown in the figure above.
While
the
lift
arm (11)
is
rising,
oil
from
the
hydraulic
pump
flows
into
the
hydraulic cylinder
through
the
position control valve (10). Then oil
pushes
out
the
piston
(6).
While
the
lift
arm (11)
is
lowering,
oil
in
the
hydraulic cylinder
is
discharged
to
the transmission
case
through the position control valve
(10)
by the
weight
of
the
implement.
At
this tfme, the lowering
8-M7
speed
of
the implement
can
be controlled by
the
lowering
speed
adjusting valve
(2)
attached
to
the
hydraulic cylinder
(3).
Turning the lowering speed
adjusting knob
(1)
clockwise
decreases
the lowering
speed, and counterclockwise increases
lowering
speed.
When the lowering
speed
adjusting valve
(2)
is
completely closed, the
lift
arm
(11)
is
held
at
its
position
since
oil in the hydraulic cylinder
is
sealed
between the piston
(6)
and lowering
speed
adjusting
valve
(2).
8 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
[8] HYDRAULIC BLOCK TYPE OUTLET
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
The
hydraulic block type
outlet
is
located
at
the
right
hand side
ofthe
engine.
This
hydraulic block type
outlet
is
provided
to
take
power
out
from the tractor
to
operate
the
hydraulic
cylinders on the implement,
such
as
front
end loader,
front
blade and
so
on.
The
rear hydraulic
outlet
is
located
at
the
right
hand side
ofthe
hydraulic cylinder body.
This rear hydraulic
outlet
is
provided
to
take
power
out
from the tractor
to
operate
the
hydraulic
cylinders on
the
implement.
When
implement
is
not
attached
From Hydraulic
1\
-
-Pump
To Position
;J
Control Valve
3
When
implement
is
attached
2
From Hydraulic
-
1\_-
Pump
B177F813
[9]
REAR
HYDRAULIC OUTLET
When
implement
is
not
attached
From Hydraulic Pump
+
-~
'11
•
To Position Control Valve
When
implement
is
attached
(1)
Block
Cover
(2)
Block Outlet Cover
(Option)
(A)
To
Implement (Inlet)
Max.
flow
17
i/min.
(4.5 U.S.
GPM,
3.7 Imp.
GPM)
No relief valve in the
hydraulic block.
(1)
Block Cover
(A)
To
Implement (Inlet)
Max.
flow
17
i/min.
(4.5
U.S.
GPM,
3.7 Imp.
GPM)
Max. pressure
13.2
to
13.7
MPa
(135
to
140 kgf/cm
2
,
1920
to
1992 psi)
(3)
Hydraulic Block
(B)
From Implement (Outlet)
(2)
Block
Outlet
Cover
(Option)
(B)
From Implement(Outlet)
/'
B177F814
2
From Hydraulic Pump
® +
1_~
(9)
'll
+
To Position Control Valve
8-M8
SGRVICING
I
CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING
8-51
SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS 8-52
TIGHTENING TORQUES 8-53
CHECKING. DISASSEMBLING
AND
SERVICING 8-54
[1] HYDRAULIC PUMP 8-54
CHECKING
AND
ADJUSTING 8-54
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING 8-55
SERVICING 8-57
[2] HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (HYDRAULIC CYLINDER. POSITION
CONTROL VALVE.
RELIEF
VALVE
AND
ETC)
8-58
CHECKING
AND
ADJUSTING 8-58
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING 8-59
(1) Separating Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly 8-59
(2) Disassembling Hydraulic CylinderAssembly 8-510
(3) Disassembling Position Control Valve
8-511
SERVICING 8-513
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
TROUBLESHOOTING
8 HYDRAULIC
5Y5TEM
Symptom
Probable Cause Solution
Reference
Page
Implement
Does
• Control valve broken
Replace
8-510
Not
Rise
• Control valve
improperly
adjusted
Adjust
8-511
(No Noise)
• Control valve
improperly
assembled
Assemble
8-511
• Relief valve spring damaged
Replace
8-511
• 5pool sticks
Repair
8-511
• Piston O-ring
or
cylinder damaged
Replace
8-510
(Noise)
• Oil strainer clogged
Clean
or
Replace
-
• 5uction pipe loosen
or
broken
Repair
or
Replace
-
• 5uction pipe connecting hose loosen
or
Repair
or
Replace
-
broken
• 5uction pipe O-ring broken
Replace
-
• Insufficienttransmission oil
Refill
G-8
• Relief valve setting pressure
too
low
Adjust.or Replace
8-58
• Hydraulic
pump
broken
Replace
8-56
Implement
Does
• Feedback rod
improperly
adjusted
Adjust
8-58
Not
Reach
Maximum
Height
Implement
Does
• Control valve
malfunctioning
Repair
or
Replace
8-510
Not
Lower
Implement
Drops
by
• Hydrau Iic cyli nder
worn
or
damaged
Replace
8-510
Its
Weight
• Piston O-ring
worn
or
damaged
Replace
8-510
• Control valve
malfunctioning
Replace
8-510
Implement
Hunts
• Control valve
improperly
adjusted
Adjust
8-511
8-51
8 HYDRAU
lIC
SYSTEM
SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11770
Item
Factory Specification
Allowable
Limit
[Hydraulic
Pump]
Pump Delivery
at
Engine 2600 rpm,
at
no
pressu re
22.0.1
Imin.
ail
Temperature
50°C,
122°F
5.8
U.S.
GPM
-
4.8Imp.GPM
at
14.7
MPa
18.0.llmin.
16.0.llmin.
150
kgf
I
cm
2
4.8
U.S.GPM
4.2
U.S.
GPM
2133
psi
4.0Imp.GPM
3.5Imp.GPM
Gear Shaft
to
Bushing
Clearance 0.020
to
0.091
mm
0.12 mm
0.0008
to
0.0036 in.
0.0047 in.
Gear Shaft
a.D.
14.970
to
14.980 mm
0.5894
to
0.5898 in.
-
Bushing
I.D.
15.000to
15.061 mm
0.5906
to
0.5930 in.
-
Side Plate
Thickness
2.48
to
2.50 mm
2.40 mm
0.0976
to
0.0984 in. 0.0945 in.
Gear
to
Casing
Clearance
-
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Lift
Arm
Free
Play
5to
10
mm
-
0.20
to
0.40 in.
Relief Valve
Setting Pressure
13.2to13.7MPa
135
to
140 kgflcm
2
-
1920
to
1991
psi
Hydraulic Cylinder
I.D. 70.05
to
70.10 mm
70.15 mm
2.7579
to
2.7598 in.
2.7618 in.
Hydraulic arm
shaft
to
Bushing Clearance 0.020
to
0.110 mm
0.30mm
0.0008
to
0.0043 in. 0.0118 in.
Hydraulic arm
shaft
Right
a.D.
37.925
to
37.950 mm
1.4931
to
1.4941 in.
-
Hydraulic arm shaft, Left
a.D.
33.925
to
33.950 mm
1.3356
to
1.3366 in.
-
Bushing, Right I.D.
37.970
to
38.035 mm
1.4949
to
1.4974 in.
-
Bushing,
Left
I.D.
33.970
to
34.035 mm
1.3374
to
1.3400 in.
-
8-S2
81700·82100·82400 WSM,
11770
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torques
of
screws and nuts on
the
table
bellow
is
especially specified.
(For general
use
screws and nuts:
See
page
G-8)
8
HYDRAU
L1C
SYSTEM
Item
N-m
kgf-m
ft·lbs
Fuel
cut
off
solenoid
mounting
screws 9.80
to
11.2
1.00to1.15
7.24to8.32
Fuel
filter
bracket
mounting
screws 23.6
to
27.4
2.4to
2.8
17.4to
20.2
Flow
priority
valve
mounting
screws 17.7
to
20.6
1.8
to
2.1
13.0
to
15.2
Delivery pipe flare nuts 29.4
to
39.2
3.0to4.0
21.7
to
28.9
Hydraulic
pump
mounting
screw and
nut
23.6
to
27.4
2.4to
2.8
17.4to
20.2
Cover
mounting
screw
34.3
to
39.2
3.5to4.0
25.3to
28.9
Hook and connecting plate
mounting
screws and 39.2
to
44.1
4.0to4.5
28.9
to
32.5
nuts
Top
link
bracket
mounting
screws 77.5
to
90.1
.
7.9tp9.2
57.2
to
66.5
Hydraulic cylinder assembly mounting screws and 39.2
to
44.1
4.0to4.5
28.9
to
32.5
nuts
Position control valve
mounting
screws
23.6to
27.4 2.4
to
2.8
17.4to
20.2
Relief valve plug 49.0
to
68.6
5.0to
7.0
36.2
to
50.6
Plug 3 39.2
to
58.8
4.0to
6.0
28.9to
43.4
Plug 2 29.4
to
49.0
3.0to
5.0
21.7
to
36.2
Plug 1 29.4
to
49.0
3.0to
5.0
21.7
to
36.2
8-53
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11770
Condition
.. Engine speed approx. 2600 rpm
.. Rated pressure 14.7
MPa
150
kgf/cm
2
2133
psi
.. Oil
temperature
..... 50°C
122
of
8 HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
Pump Test
III
NOTE
.. Before pump testing, perform
the
Flowmeter
Connecting
and Test Preparation.
(See
page 8-54).
1.
Open
the
loading valve completely.
2.
Start
the
engine and set
at
approx. 2600 rpm.
3.
Read
and note
the
pump delivery
at
no pressure.
4. Slowly close
the
loading valve
to
increase pressure approx.
14.7
MPa
(150 kgf/cm
2
,
2133 psi).
5.
Read
and note
the
pump
flow
at
rated pressure.
6.
Open
the
loading valve and stop the engine.
7.
If
the
pump delivery does
not
reach
the
allowable
limit,
check
the
pump suction line, oil
filter
or
hydraulic pump.
Hydraulic pump delivery
at
22i/min.
Factory
spec.
Above 5.8 U.S.GPM
no pressure
4.8Imp.GPM
18i/min.
Factory
spec.
Above
4.8
U.S.GPM
Hydraulic pump delivery
at
4.0Imp.GPM
rated pressu
re
16i/min.
Allowable
limit
4.2
U.S.GPM
3.5Imp.GPM
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING
Hood, Front Grille and Side Cover
1.
Open
the
hood (1).
2.
Remove the
front
grille
(2)
and side cover
RH
(3).
2
(1) Hood
(2) Front Grille
8-55
(3)
Side
Cover
RH
81700·82100·82400 WSM, 11770
8 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Side Plate
and
Gear
1.
Remove
the
side
plate
(4).
2.
Remove
the
drive
gear
(2) and
driven
gear
(3)
from
the
casing
(1).
(When
reassembling)
• Install
the
side plate,
noting
its
location
and
direction
.
• Install
the
gears,
noting
its
direction.
8177P224
SERVICING
(1)
Casing
(2)
Drive Gear
(3)
Driven Gear
(4)
Side
Plate
Clearance
between
Tip
of
Gear
Tooth
and
Casing
1.
Measure
the
gear
a.D.
with
an
outside
micrometer.
2.
Measure
the
casing I.D.
with
a
cylinder
gauge.
3.
If
the
clearance exceeds
the
allowable
limit,
replace
the
assembly.
8177P225
Clearance between
tip
of
gear
tooth
and casing
Allowable
limit
0.15mm
0.0059 in.
Clearance
between
Bushing
and
Shaft
1.
Measure
the
shaft
a.D.
with
an
outside
micrometer.
2.
Measure
the
bushing I.D.
with
a
cylinder
gauge.
3.
If
the
clearance exceeds
the
allowable
limit,
replace.
Factory
spec.
0.020toO.091 mm
Clearance between
0.0008
to
0.0036 in.
bushing and shaft
Allowable
limit
0.12mm
0.0047 in.
ShaftO.D.
Factory
spec.
14.970to 14.980 mm
0.5894
to
0.5898 in.
8ushing
I.D.
Factory
spec.
15.000to
15.061
mm
0.5906
to
0.5930 in.
Side Plate Thickness
1.
Measure
the
side
plate
thickness
with
an
outside
micrometer.
2.
Ifthe
thickness
is
less
than
the
allowable
limit,
replace
it.
Factory
spec.
2.48
to
2.50 mm
0.0976
to
0.0984 in.
Side
plate thickness
Allowable
limit
2.40 mm
0.0945 in.
8-57
8 HYDRAU
L1C
SYSTEM
81700'82100·82400 WSM,11770
[2] HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (HYDRAULIC CYLINDER, POSITION
CONTROL VALVE,
RELIEF
VALVE
AND
ETC)
CHECKING
AND
ADJUSTING
8177F816
Relief Valve Setting Pressure
1.
Remove the seat under cover.
2.
Remove
the
plug from
front
of
hydraulic cylinder block.
3.
Install
the
adaptor 58. Then connect
the
cable and pressure
gauge
to
adaptor 58.
4.
Remove
the
position control lever stopper.
5.
Start
the
engine and set
at
maximum speed.
6.
Move the position control lever all
way
up
to
operate
the
relief valve and read the gauge.
7.
If
the
pressure
is
not
within
the
factory specifications, adjust
with
the
adjusting shims (1).
8.
After
checking, reinstall
the
position control lever stopper.
Relief valve setting
13.2
to
13.7
MPa
Factory
spec.
135
to
140
kgf/cm
2
pressure
1920to
1991
psi
Condition
CD
Engine speed Maximum
• Oil temperature
45
to
55°C
113
to
131°F
(Reference)
.. Thickness
of
shims
(1)
:
0.1
mm (0.0039 in.)
0.4 mm (0.0157 in.)
0.8 mm (0.0315 in.)
•
Pressure
change per
0.1
mm (0.0039 in.)
shim:
Approx.
147.1
kPa
1.5
kgf/cm
2
21.3
psi
(1)
Shim
Lift
Arm
Free
Play
1.
Set
the
position control lever
(2)
to
the
lowest position.
2.
Start
the
engine, and set
at
the
idling
speed.
3.
Move
the
position
control
lever
(2)
to
the
uppermost
position. (Until
the
lever
(2)
contact
to
the
stopper plate (3).)
4.
Move
the
lift
arm
(1)
to
the
upper end by hand and measure
the free play.
5.
If
the
measurement
is
not
within
the
factory specifications,
adjust
the
free play by changing
the
position control feed
back rod setting length.
(3) Stopper Plate
Lift
a
rm
free play
(1)
LiftArm
(2) Position Control Lever
8-58
Factory
spec.
5to
10
mm
0.20
to
0.40 in.
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
8 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Hook and connecting
39.2
to
44.1
N·m
plate mounting screws
4.0
to
4.5 kgf·m
and nuts
28.9
to
32.5 ft-Ibs
Top link bracket
77.5to90.1
N·m
Tightening torque
7.9to9.2
kgf·m
mounting screws
57.2
to
66.5 ft-Ibs
Hydraulic cylinder
39.2
to
44.1N·m
assembly mounting
4.0
to
4.5
kgf·m
screws and nuts
28.9
to
32.5 ft-Ibs
Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly
1.
Remove
the
top
link
and disconnect the I
ift
rods.
2.
Disconnect the
wiring
harness
(2)
and delivery pipe (1).
3.
Remove
the
external snap ring (10).
4.
Move
the
levers (4), (5), (11)
to
outside and disconnect
the
rods (8),
(9).
5.
Remove
the
hook
(7),
connecting
plate
(6) and
top
link
bracket
(3).
6.
Remove
the
hydraulic cylinder assembly
mounting
screws
and nuts, and separate
the
hydraulic cylinder assembly (12).
(When reassembling)
(4)
Seat
Rail
(5)
Tool
Box
(6)
Seat Stay
(7)
Hook
(8)
Rod
(9)
Rod
(10) External Snap
Ring
(11) Hi-Lo Gear Shift Lever
(12) Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly
(1) Seat
(2) Lowering
Speed
Adjusting Knob
(3)
Seat Under Cover
(1)
Delivery Pipe
(2)
Wiring Harness
(3)
Top Link Bracket
(4) Mid
PTO
Gear Shift Lever
(5)
Rear
PTO
Gear Shift Lever
(6)
Connecting Plate
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING
(1) Separating HydraulicCylinder Assembly
Seat, Seat Rail, Seat Stay and Seat Under Cover
1.
Remove
the
seat
(1)
and
lowering
speed adjusting knob (2).
2.
Remove
the
tool
box
(5)
and seat under cover (3).
3.
Remove
the
seat stay
(6)
and seat rail
(4)
as
a unit.
8-59
8
HYDRAU
Lie
SYSTEM
81700·82100'82400 WSM,11770
(3)
O-ring
(4)
Feedback
Rod
(5)
Alignment Marks
(6)
Alignment Marks
(1)
Lift
Arm
LH
(2)
Lift Arm
RH
(3)
Hydraulic Arm Shaft
Lift
Arm, Hydraulic Arm Shaft and Hydraulic Arm
1.
Remove
the
position control feedback rod (4).
2.
Remove the external snap ring, and remove
the
lift
arm
LH
(1).
3.
Draw
out
the hydraulic arm shaft
(3)
and
lift
arm
RH
(2)
as
a
unit.
(When reassembling)
o
Align
the
alignment
marks (5)
of
the
hydraulic
arm and
hydraulic arm shaft.
o
Align
the
alignment
marks (6)
of
the
lift
arm
LH
and
hydraulic arm shaft.
o Apply grease
to
the
right
and
left
bushi
ngs
and O-ri
ngs.
o Take care not
to
damage
the
O-rings.
(1)
Position Control Valve
Position control valve
23.6
to
27.4 N'm
Tightening torque
mounting screws
2.4
to
2.8 kgf·m
17.4
to
20.2 ft-Ibs
(1) Hydraulic Piston
(2)
8ackup
Ring
HydraulicPiston
1.
Inject the compressed air
into
the
hydraulic cylinder, and
take
out
the
hydraulic piston (1).
(When reassembling)
o Take care
not
to
damage
the
O-ring and backup ring.
o Apply transmission fluid
to
the O-ring.
.. Replace the O-ring
if
it
is
defective,
worn
or
scratched, which
may
case
oil leakage.
(2) Disassembling Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly
Position Control Valve
1.
Remove
the
position control valve
mounting
screws, and
remove
the
position control valve(l).
(When reassembling)
o Take care
not
to
damage
the
O-rings.
8177P238
8-510
81700·82100'82400 WSM,11770 8 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Lowering Speed Adjusting Valve
1.
Remove
the
lowering
speed adjusting valve body
(2)
with
the
lowering speed adjusting shaft
(1).
2.
Draw
out
the
poppet
(3)
and spring (4).
(When reassembling)
.. Take care
not
to
damage the O-rings.
(1) Lowering Speed Adjusting Shaft
(2) Lowering Speed Adjusting Valve 80dy
(3) Poppet
(4)
Spring
8177P242
Relief Valve
1.
Remove
the
plug (1), and
draw
out
the shim (2), spring (3),
poppet
(4)
and
the
valve seat (5).
(When reassembling)
.. Take care
not
to
damage the O-ring.
49.0
to
68.6 N'm
Tightening
torque
Relief valve plug
5.0to
7.0
kgf'm
36.2
to
50.6 ft-Ibs
II
IMPORTANT
•
After
disassembling and assembling the relief valve, be sure
to
adjust
the
relief valve setting pressure.
II
IMPORTANT
• Measure
the
distance (A)
between
valve
body
and
lever
before disassembling.
(4) Poppet
(5) Valve Seat
(3)
Snap
Ring
(4) Nuts
(1) Lever
(2) Spool
(1)
Plug
(2)
Shim
(3) Spring
(3) Disassembling Position Control Valve
Spool
1.
Remove
the
nuts
(4)
and snap
ri
ng (3).
2.
Draw
out
the
spool
(2)
with
the lever
(1).
8177F817 0
8-S
11
8
HYDRAU
Lie
SYSTEM
2
81700·82100·82400 WSM, 11770
Poppet 2 and Unload Poppet
1.
Remove
the
plug 3 (4), and
draw
out
the
poppet
2 (3).
2.
Remove
the
plug 2 (2), and
draw
out
the
unload
poppet
(1).
(When reassembling)
• Take care
not
to
damage
the
O-ring.
39.2
to
58.8 N'm
Plug
3 4.0
to
6.0
kgf·m
Tightening torque
28.9
to
43.4 ft-Ibs
29.4
to
49.0 N'm
Plug 2
3.0
to
5.0
kgf'm
21.7
to
36.2 ft-Ibs
29.4
to
49.0 N'm
Tightening
torque
Plug 1
3.0
to
5.0
kgf'm
21.7
to
36.2 ft-Ibs
Poppet 1
1.
Remove
the
plug 1 (1), and
draw
out
the
poppet
1 (2).
(When reassembling)
• Take care
not
to
damage
the
O-ring.
8177P241
(1)
Unload Poppet
(2)
Plug
2
(1)
Plug
1
8-512
(3)
Poppet 2
(4)
Plug
3
(2)
Poppet 1
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770
SERVICING
B177P243
B177P244
8 HYDRAU
L1C
SYSTEM
Hydraulic Cylinder Bore
1.
Check
the cylinder internal surface
for
scoring
or
damage.
2.
Measure the cylinder
1.0.
with
a cylinder gauge.
3.
If
the
measurement exceeds the allowable
limit,
replace
the
hydraulic cylinder block.
Factory
spec.
70.05
to
70.10 mm
2.7579
to
2.7598 in.
Cylinder
I.D.
Allowable
limit
70.15 mm
2.7618 in.
Clearance between HydraulicArm Shaft and Bushing
1.
Measure
the
hydraulic arm
shaft
0.0.
with
an
outside
micrometer.
2.
Measure
the
bushing 1.0.
with
a
cylinder
gauge,
and
calculate the clearance.
3.
If
the clearance exceeds
the
allowable
limit,
replace
the
bushing.
Factory
0.020toO.110mm
spec.
0.0008
to
0.0043 in.
Right
Allowable
Clearance
0.30 mm
between
limit
0.0118 in.
hydraulic arm
Factory
0.020toO.110 mm
shaft and
bushing
spec.
0.0008
to
0.0043 in.
Left
Allowable
0.30 mm
limit
0.0118 in.
Right
Factory
37.925
to
37.950 mm
Hydraulic arm
spec.
1.4931
to
1.4941 in.
shaft
O.D.
Left
Factory
33.925
to
33.950 mm
spec.
1.3356
to
1.3366 in.
Right
Factory
37.970
to
38.035 mm
Bushing
I.D.
spec.
1.4949
to
1.4974 in.
~after
press
itted)
Left
Factory
33.970
to
34.035 mm
spec.
1.3374
to
1.3400 in.
8-513
MECHANISM
CONTENTS
[1] WIRING DIAGRAM
AND
ELECTRICAL
CIRCUIT
9-M1
[2] STARTING SYSTEM
9-M5
(1)
Starter
9-M6
(2)
Glow
Plug
9-M7
(3) Safety Switch
9-M7
[3] ENGINE
KEY
SWITCH SHUT·OFF
SYSTEM
9-M8
(1) Fuel Cut
Off
Solenoid
9-M8
[4] CHARGING SYSTEM
9-M9
(1) AC
Dynamo
9-M11
(2) Regulator 9-M
11
(3)
Alternator
9-M
12
(4)
IC
Regulator 9-M
12
[5] LIGHTING SYSTEM 9-M13
(1) Head
Light
9-M14
(2) Hazard
Light
9-M
14
[6] EASY
CHECKER
9-M
15
(1)
Indication
Items 9-M15
(2)
Low
Engine Oil Pressure 9-M
15
[7] GAUGE 9-M
16
(1) Fuel
Quantity
9-M
16
(2)
Coolant
Temperature
9-M
16
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
[1] WIRING
DIAGRAM
AND
ELECTRICAL
CIRCUIT
•
With
AC
Dynamo
•
Main
Switch • Combination Switch
• Color
of
Wiring
R.H.
Head
~
= 0.5
Or
Light
~
+'.><.
Co.""5--"B'+-t--_--.
I
E~F
if
'0
uel Gauge
T T T
C~
iTemperature
if
'0
Gauge
T
Combination Switch
I
Easy
Checker
~ ~
t
Lamp¢=!
La~
,------_--+--cel
u
--------J
fi
C.5
RW
r=
.5HIN
(.5
L
.~
HY
5~
0.5WR
F
0.5 BR
.5
~
0.5 RY
~
~
VI
O.~
INY
1==
W
-
....
--
........
----
White
Or
-----------
Orange
RL
-----------
Red
/ Blue
BY
---
..........
_--
Black/Yellow
R
---_
..
oo
..............
Red
WR
---------_
..
White
/
Red
RG
-----------
Red/Green
GW
-----------
Green
/White
·L
-------------
Blue WY
-----------
White/Yellow
RY
-----------
Red/Yellow
GB
--_
..
_------
Green / Black
Y
-------------
Yellow
RB
.._
....
_----_
..
Red
/ Black BW
---
..
------
..
Black
/White
Sb
......
--
...........
Sky Blue
B
-------------
Black
RW
..
---------
..
Red/White
BR
-----------
Black /
Red
YL
--_
..
_
..
_----
Yellow
/ Blue
G
-------------
Green
L.H. Hazard
R.H. Hazard
Hazard Unit
g
Working Light
j
(Optional)
aJ
~
-l
aJ
a:
a:
0p::
~
LO
~ilC,ILC
ci
0
.....
3:
a:
aJ
LO
~
ci
0
R.H. Hazard L.H. Hazard
Light Light Fuse
RH'h~~it2R]~
Head
Light
Switch Hazard
Light
Switch
~
81
T
1
~
82
R L
OFF
•
1
...
-
-
-
ON
...
...
...
OFF
•
2
•
-
~
30
AC
19
50
Key Position
OFF
•
ON
... ...
PREHEAT
-
-
-
START
... ... ...
...
-
- -
-
0.5
G
lJ
~~
Maio Switoh
3H
_--++O"-,.-,,,-~--,-~-,-,;;·-,------_B_2'\;-\C-
----o-~
n'
c1i
0.5
Or
'-.
/f
."i
RY1
,-
---'
I--t-=::tt
0
"""-"-'-
~Y----,
--
'------
0.5 Y
0.5RW-~
-
0.5
Or
S
.~RV------.l
0.5
GB
-f-----
0.5HIN
I
[I
c-2Sb
.5INH
L.H.
Head~
= .5
Or
Light
~
+-"".",,5---"'--..
HH--------.
2HW
1.2
BW
=
~
Safety Switch
.25
~~
S'h
~~
Safety Wltc
1
1
.25 L =
IGf--.r::;::r--
S . h
.2 B
~
Safety Wltc
3'
,
a:
(\.L(
aJ
C')
aJ
aJ
MMiV
(\J
(\J
I
TiT
TiT
=d:
Glow
Plug
Ti
T
P
Fuel Level
Fuel Cut Off
Solenoid
Sensor
AC Dynamo
0.5WY
Coolant I
Temper~ture
0
Sensor
""""",O,-".5,-,L~I-+_-+-~>I-
--+
__
--t
---t..,,j---
--+-+-----'
Oil Pressure
~.o
3:
~
Switch (j)lf.
(\J
1!J
~~L!R-,---
-,
(\J (\J
I\,
a:p:
mD
i~~~
rn
TIT
I Battery
Ti
'r
EE
Slow Blow
Starter Fuse (30A)
Motor
B177F901
9-M1
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
•
With
AC
Dynamo
• Color
of
Wiring
RL
RB,
WY
•••••••••••
White/Yellow
GW
••••••••••• Green
/White
Yellow
/ Blue
Sky Blue
Green / Black
YL
GB
Sb
Black /
Yellow
Black /
Red
BY
BR
Red
/Yellow
Black /
White
Red/Green
RY
RG
BW
RW
•••••••••••
Red
/White
RB
•••••.•••••
Red
/ Black
RL
•••••••••••
Red
/ Blue
Orange
White/Red
RY
Or
WR
Y
..
~
..
_---
..
__
....
-
Yellow
B
......
-
......
_-----
Black
G
-------------
Green
Fuse
5A
~
15A
3:
~
a:
10A
W·············
White
R •••••••••••••
Red
L ••••••••••••• Blue
RG
I.l~azard
Unit
>-
a:
>-
a:
>-
a:
>-
a:
Combination
Switch
6
Q.
E
CIl
....J
~
:::J
(J)
(J)
1.7
~
0...
W
6
(j)
c
'61
c
L.l.J
....J
>-
3:
(j)
Ol
:::J
CIl
<.9
~
:::J
~
(j)
Q.
E
(j)
l-
e
CIl
o
o
o
o
(J)
c
(j)
(f)
~
:::J
!@
CIl
o
o
o
co
....J
>-
(j)
Ol
:::J
<3
I
}-------.------{
I
Qj
:::J
LL
Qj
:::J
LL
....
.r::.
Ol
:.:J
-g
15
(j)
W
I
I
a:
>-
0
I
E
Ol
:.:J
-g
15
(j)
W
I
I
....i
E
Ol
:.:J
- 8
~
W
I
a:
8
~
W
I
....i
E
Ol
:.:J
3:
a:
3:
a:
co
Q.
~cb~
t
Cii
1.7
~
27
:.:J
27
~W
CiiW"EW
I N
CIl
I
.
CIl
~
I I
a:
.
I I
....i
a:
Q.
E
CIl
....J
-0
Cii
1.7
~
W
I
I
....i
?
.(>
.(>
;>
.........
'\Ar+--+--.
~~
r-
f--*-{
;j~
~~
f
~
> <
~
:>
------"
L
~
<
~
B2
~I
~
~~
K
'---+-<O------f-O---+--
B~
')
0,
'---------~~.__>-____4I
\~
_+R---_-r~
J
'''l
1
.........
--+-olii
Vju
Regulator
a:
3:
Q.
E
CIl
-a:
1.7
Ol
W
Cii
.r::.
o
>-
a:
O
;~>-
u_u
L_O-
a:
I
~
co
a:
a:
--{)
(
AA
nO
A A
Q.
~vv
UI
E
CIl
....J
0
Qj
cu
~
&~
I
u
1.7
(f)
'6
W
/
Ol
c
,
:::J
-
0:::
cu
?;
(j)
_ v
0
..c;:
)
~
(5
~
1('"
0...
B177F902
Denotes
battery
voltage
at
any position
of
mai n switch.
Denotes
battery
voltage
when
turning
on
the
main switch.
Denotes
ground
line.
9-M2
81700·B2100·B2400 WSM, 11770
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
• With Alternator
• Main Switch • Combination Switch
• Color
of
Wiring
~
30
AC
19
50
Key
Position
OFF
•
ON
- -
PREHEAT
- - -
START
- -
- -
Head Light Switch Hazard Light Switch
~
B1
T
1
~
B2
R
L
OFF
•
1
.-
---e
ON
-
-
...
OFF
•
-
2
•
-
W
---_
..
_-------
White
Or
-----------
Orange
RL
--
.....
_------
Red
/ Blue
BY
----------
...
Black/Yellow
R
-------------
Red
WR
-----------
White /
Red
RG
-----oo
..
_---
Red
/Green
GW
-----------
Green/White
L
-------------
Blue
WY
-----------
White/Yellow
RY
---_
.......
--
..
Red/Yellow
GB
-----------
Green / Black
Y
---
..........-...
Yellow
RB
-----------
Red
/ Black
BW
..
_
..
_-------
Black/White
Sb
......
_-------
Sky
Blue
B
..._................
Black
RW
..........
_----
Red/White
BR
00
...
_____
---
..
Black
/Red
YL
.........
_-----
Yellow / Blue
G
--
..
-
........
_----
Green
L.H. Hazard
R.H. Hazard
Lamp
¢:::::J
Lamp=:>
Working Light
(Optional)
=
r=
Easy 00 U
11:'
.5
RW
Checker
a
15
TI)
5 H W '
\C'.Y \C'.Y
.5L
,---'
I
rl--+------''''"'.~'''_'X!.LI
YH'-'-I-iU~r----IH-----'
II!
'----+-1-----'
0.5 RY
0.5 BR
E~
</
v Fuel Gauge
11
C~
Temperature
Gauge
1
'1H
R.H.
Head~,E:!,0.5
Or
Light
~tJ!-+"'0'"".5'--'11"'--+-t--~
0.5 RY
.5 Y
0.5WY
'=
Combination Switch
0.5 G
~~
rP*\
Main Switch
I
i1
II
I-------'
=r=
[
.~
liW
L
B1
~
0.5 RW
B2\0---
n·;I,
?
f--
0.5
or.---\"-<;:--R---J
T /l'
'1
HYI .----
---'
I
~_+_=tf.L.<;'"'---'-----Y---J
0.5GB
f---
0.5HW
f--r-----..
0.5 RW C
f--
0.5 Or I
c::-
'1
RY
-f-----l-
.'1 Y
L---!---+-------+-+-----+--+-------------H-i-+-t-i----"""-'-'"'-L----jl::=_f--
2HW
L----------+~~--_+--------'--------_++__t_r_+_----------~I
1.25BY
;j
I1H
3R
3R
JO.5WRI
=
.5
HY
L.H.
Head~
=0.5
Or
Light
~
..p<'-'<.5'--!R"---t+-_---+
U
7/T
*
Fuel Level
Sensor
B177F903
0.5WY
Coolant~~
Temperature
Sensor
~0~.5~L=---------:::+-~l_------+_--+_-----___t'i"t_-----+t__'
om."".
~
~
~.\
3R
~~
Switch U
J-
1"1~:JO;
~
MM
~
m~
Tfr
Battery
7i
T
EEl
Glow Plug
TIT
Slow Blow
Starter Fuse (50A)
Motor Fuel Cut Off
Solenoid
CD
C\J
'=~
1.25 =
~
Safety Switch
.25
L
t:!
.25L=I~
1.25
~
Safety Switch
.25 L
=
iGJ----r=;:l---
.
1.2SBW
~
Safety SWitch
9-M3
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
B1700-B2100-B2400
WSM,11770
•
With
Alternator
• Color of Wiring
W
-----------_
..
White
Y
--
..
-_
..
_------
Yellow
Or
....
_-------
Orange
RB
-----------
Red
/ Black
RG
-----------
Red
/ Green
BR
-----------
Black /
Red
GB
..
_
....
-----_
..
Green / Black
R
-----------_
..
Red
B
-------------
Black
WR
-----------
White/Red
RW
-----------
Red
/White
RY
--_
..
-------
Red/Yellow
BY
-----------
Black/Yellow
Sb
.......
_--
..
_--
Sky Blue
L
-------_
.....
--
Blue G
-------------
Green
WY
----_
..
_----
White/Yellow
RL
-----------
Red
/ Blue BW
...........
_----
Black
/White
GW
....
_--------
Green
/White
YL
...
_-_
..
_-
....
Yellow
/ Blue
RG
[llHazard
Unit
>-
a:
>-
a:
>-
a:
>-
a:
0.
E
(lj
-.J
~
:::J
en
en
~
1.7
0...
W
(5
OJ
c
'0>
c
w
OJ
OJ
:::J
(lj
C)
~
:::J
~
OJ
0.
E
OJ
l-
e
(lj
(5
o
o
)---------+----i
I
OJ
OJ
:::J
(lj
I
C)
ill
:::J
LL
>-
~
-.J
CO
0
>-
Combination
Switch
,
...
,
...
g
~
~
.I::
0
.8
~
'~
OJ
(J)_
g
~
en
:::J
>,
LL
ill
3
ro
0
(J)
m
~
a:
3
co
g
~
0
U)
a:
co
o
o
en
c
OJ
(J)
~
I@
l-
e
(lj
(5
o
o
OJ
:::J
LL
1:
OJ
:.:J
"0
15
gl
W
I
I
a:
1:
OJ
:.:J
-g
15
:l!.
W
I
..J
~
8
I-
W
I
a:
1:
OJ
:.:J
1
1:
OJ
:.:J
'ro
8
I-
W
I
..J
0.
~
h
~
27
~
27
¥bD-ew
-ew
I
~ ~
I
~ ~
a:
:i
I
..J
a:
0.
E
(lj
-.J
-e
(lj
1,7
~
W
I
I
..J
'''l
,
..
'''l
,
..
'''l
,
..
'''l
,
..
\
I
I
I
-
Fuel
Cdt
Off
Solenoid
C'}--------'
I
0.
E
(lj
-.J
o
co
(J
1,7
'g
W
B177F904
Denotes
battery
voltage
at
any position
of
main switch.
Denotes
battery
voltage
when
turning
on
the
main switch.
Denotes
ground
line.
9-M4
B1700·82100·82400
WSM,11770
[2]
STARTING
SYSTEM
Main
Switch Table
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
OFF
ON
PREHEAT
START
30
•
AC
19 50
At
the
"PREHEAT" Position
"-~-1
5A
f-----
15Af-----
10AI----
®
T
I(J)
I
-L
B177F905
At
the
"START" Position
T
1(J)
-L
B177F906
(1)
Main
Switch
(2) Safety Switches
(3) Slow Blow
Fuse
(4) Starter
Motor
(5)
Glow
Plugs
(6) Pre-heat Indicator Lamp
(7) Battery
When
the
main
switch
(1)
is
turned
to
the
PREHEAT
position,
the
terminal
30
is
connected
to
the
terminals 19 and
AC.
The
glow
plugs
(5)
become
red-hot, and
at
the
same
time,
the
pre-heat indicator
lamp
(6)
also lights on.
When
the
main
switch
is
then
turned
to
the
START
position
with
the
safety switches
(2)
on,
the
terminal
30
is
connected
to
the
terminals
50
and
AC
so
that
the
starter
motor
(4)
begins running and
the
glow
plugs are kept red-hot.
The
main switch automatically returns
to
the
ON
position,
the
terminal
30
is
connected
only
to
the
terminal
AC,
thereby causing
the
starting circuit
to
be
opened, stopping
the
starter motor.
9-M5
81700'82100·82400
WSM,11770
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
(2)
Glow
Plug
(c) Time
(Sec.)
(5)
Super Glow Plug
(6) Conventional Quick-
heating type Glow Plug
(7) Glow Plug Current
(a)
Glow
Plug Temperature
(0C)
(b) Current (A)
(1)
Sheath Tube
(2)
Insulation Powder
(3) Heater also functioning
as
a
Resistor
(4) Heater
This
plug
is
atwo-material type
QGS
(Quick Glow
System)
for
quick temperature rise, and
has
self-
controlling function
as
well
as
excellent durability.
The
heater
(4)
connected in series
to
the
heater (3),
which also functions
as
the resistor,
is
incorporated in
the
sheath tube
(1)
of
the
super
glow
pi
ug.
The
resistance
of
this
heater
(3) cum resistor
is
small
when
the
temperature
is
low,
while
the
resistance becomes large
when
the
temperature
rises.
Therefore, because sufficient current
is
flown
to
the
heater
(4)
during
the
initial
period
of
energization,
the
temperature
rises
quickly and
the
resistance grows
with
the
rise
in
the
temperature
of
the
resistor,
the
flowing
current
is
reduced
to
prevent
the
heater
(4)
from being heated.
The
ignition
point
is
in
the
area
of
2
to
3 mm
(0.079
to
0.118 in.) from the
tip
of
the
plug in order
to
reduce
its
projection
into
the
combustion
chamber.
5
©
..
10
20
30
40
50
C111F023
1
1200
1
1000
a
BOO
®
C140F060
(3)
Safety Switch
Released
A
•
Depressed
8 A
t •
A: From
Main
Switch
B:
To
Starter
8177F908
The
safety switch prevents current from
flowing
to
the
starter
when
the
safety
switches
are
not
depressed. This
is
to
ensure safe starting.
The safety switches are
located
three
(Clutch
pedal,
PTO
gear shift lever and main gear
shift
lever
for
manual transmission model
or
Hi-Lo gear
shift
lever
for
hydrostatic transmission model)
different
position.
9-M7
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
[3] ENGINE KEY SWITCH SHUT-OFF SYSTEM
CD
r-----j
5A
f--------,
T
®:
...L
1.7
W
®
B177F909
(8) Pre-heat Indicator Lamp
(9)
Battery
(6)
Fuel
Cut
Off
Solenoid
(7) Glow
Plugs
(4) Slow Blow
Fuse
(5) Starter
Motor
(1)
Fuse
(2) Main Switch
(3) Safety Switches
On
the
engine key switch
shut-off
system,
turning
to
the
"No
Fuel
Injection" position
through
the
fuel
the
main switch
from
the
ON
position
to
the
OFF
cut
off
solenoid.
position moves
the
fuel injection pump control rack
(1) Fuel Cut
Off
Solenoid
Flowing
of
the
battery current
into
the
fuel cut
off
solenoid, the plunger
(2)
move
to
left
side
so
that
the
movement
of
control rack
(4)
becomes free. When
the
battery current stops, the plunger
(2)
is
returned
to
the
original position by
the
spring
to
keep
the
control rack
(4)
in
"No
fuel injection" position.
(1)
Fuel
Cut
Off
Solenoid
(2) Plunger
(3)
Injection Pump
(4)
Control
Rack
9-M8
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
[4] CHARGING SYSTEM
II
With
AC
Dynamo
®
T®
I
..L
B177F910
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
(J)
1.7
W
(1)
Main
switch
(2)
Fuse
(3) Slow Blow
Fuse
(4) Regulator
(5) Battery
(6)
AC
Dynamo
(7) Charge Lamp
The
charging
system
supplies
electric power for
various
electrical
devices
and
also
charges
the battery
while the engine
runs.
It
consists
of a
AC
dynamo
and
a regulator.
9-M9
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
• With Alternator
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
,------1
iDA
t------------,---------,
CD
30
V""C
Off
50
=
I
0'
I
..L
B177F911
1.7®
w
'A
'A
''I
"
(1)
Main
Switch
(2)
Fuse
(3) Charge Lamp
(4) Slow Blow
Fuse
(5)
Alternator
(6)
IC
Regulator
(7) Battery
The
charging
system
supplies
electric power for
various
electrical
devices
and
also
charges
the battery
while the engine
runs.
This
alternator
has
IC
regulator.
9-M10
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
(1)
AC
Dynamo
0022F020
(2) Regulator
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
This
dynamo
is
an 8-8 pole rotating
magnet
type
generator. It
is
simple
in
construction, consisting
of
a
stator and rotor. The
rotor
is
made up
of
eight
permanent magnet pole pieces assembled on a shaft
and rotates on
the
center
of
the
stator around which
eight electromagnetic coils are provided for.
This
dynamo
produces
higher
voltage
in
slow
speed rotation, and charges electric current
to
the
battery during engine idling.
0302P006
r-------------------------·
I T
4
, R
2
I T
5
I
I
,
Q)
®
0302F066
®
®
®
A regulator
has
two
functions:
1.
When
the
battery voltage
is
low,
it
turns
the
SCR
on
to
form a charging circuit
to
the
battery.
2.
During charging,
it
turns
the
charging lamp off.
(1) Light Blue
(AC
Dynamo)
(2) Light Blue
(AC
Dynamo)
(3) Yellow (Main Switch Terminal
AC)
(4) Green (Charge Lamp)
(5)
Red
(Main Switch Terminal No.30)
(6)
Black (Ground)
C1:
Capacitor
D1:
Diode
D2:
Diode
D3:
Diode
D4:
Diode
R1:
Resistor
R2:
Resistor
R3:
Resistor
R4:
Resistor
S1:
SCR
(Silicon Controlled Rectifier)
S2:
SCR
(Silicon Controlled Rectifier)
T
1:
Tra nsistor
T2:
Transistor
T3:
Tra nsistor
T4:
Transistor
T5:
Transistor
ZD1:
Zener Diode
9-M11
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
(3) Alternator
A compact alternator
with
an
IC
regulator
is
used,
having the
following
characteristics:
• Approximately
26% lighter and 17% smaller than
a standard alternator.
•
Cooling
performance
and
safety
have been
improved
by
combining
the
cooling fan
with
the
rotor and incorporating the fan/rotor
unit
inside
the alternator.
•
IC
regulator
is
fitted
inside the alternator.
•
The
rectifier,
IC
regulator and similar components
are
easy
to
remove, making
it
easier
to
service the
alternator.
0087F032
(4)
Ie
Regulator
2
4
3
I
I
I
-L.
1
(7)
Alternator
(8)
Rotor Coil
5
(5)
Battery
(6)
IC
Regulator
(3) Charge Lamp
(4) Load
I
L--=T-
8
0087F033
(1)
Stator Coil
(2)
Main Switch
An
IC
regulator
uses
solid state transistors, chips or
other semiconductor elements instead
of
the relays
in a conventional regulator. Stable characteristics
are
achieved by cutting
off
the
field current.
IC
regulators have
the
following
characteristics:
• The control voltage does
not
change over time,
so
the
need
for
readjustment
is
eliminated. Since
there
are
no
moving
parts,
IC
regulators
are
extremely durable and resistant
to
vibration.
•
The
overheat compensation characteristics ensure
that
the
control
voltage
is
reduced
as
the
temperature
rises,
so
the
battery
is
charged
at
just
the
right
level.
The
internal circuitry
of
the
IC
regulator
is
shown
in
the
diagram.
It
consists
of
a
hybrid
IC
incorporating a monolithic
IC.
The
internal circuitry
of
the
monolithic
IC
extremely complex,
so
it
is
shown
as
simply "M.IC circuit".
Tr1
acts
as
the
contacts
controlling
the
field
current, and
Tr2
acts
as
the
charge
lamp
relay
controlling the flashing
ofthe
charge lamp.
The
M.IC
circuit controls
Tr1
and
Tr2,
and monitors
the alternator
output
voltage, and detects any drop
in Lterminal voltage or breaks in the rotor coil.
9-M12
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
[5] LIGHTING SYSTEM
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
CD
,----r-l15Ar------------------------
--_---,
®
10Al-----,.---------------...,.----
®
5A
1-----,
L
R 81 T 1
--f
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
: I
@
~_
-l
B177F912
(1)
Fuse
(7)
Slow Blow
Fuse
(12)
R.H.
Hazard Lamp (17)
L.H.
Head Light
(2)
Fuse
(8)
Pre-heat Indicator Lamp
(13)
L.H.
Hazard Light (18)
R.H.
Head
Light
(3)
Fuse
(9)
Battery
(14)
R.H.
Hazard Light (19)
Oil Pressure Switch
(4)
Main
Switch
(10)
Charge Lamp
(15)
L.H.
Tail Light
(20)
Engine Oil Pressure Lamp
(5)
Hazard
Unit
(11
)
L.H.
Hazard Lamp
(16)
R.H.
Tail Light (21)
Working
Light (Optional)
(6)
Combination Switch
The
lighting
system
consists
of combination
switch
(light
switch
and
hazard switch),
head
lights, tail
lights,
hazard
unit, hazard
lights,
pilot
lamps,
etc.
9-M13
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
(1) Head
Light
Battery
or
Charging
System
L.H. Head Light
R.H. Head Light
L.H. Tail Light
R.H. Tail Light
B177F913
The
light
switch,
which
forms
a
combination
switch
with
the
hazard switch,
has
two
position;
OFF
and
ON.
(2) Hazard
Light
Current
passes
through
the
light
circuit
as
shown
in
the
figure above.
L.H. Hazard Light
Fuse
R.H. Hazard Lamp
L.H. Hazard Lamp
R.H. Hazard Light
Hazard
Unit
Battery
or
Charging
1--
......
System
1-----'
B177F914
The hazard switch,
which
forms a
combination
switch
with
the
light
switch,
has
three positions;
OFF,
1 and
2.
At
either
switch lever position
of
1 or
2,
current flows
to
the
same
circuit, blinking
the
hazard
lights and indicator lamps
as
shown in
the
figure
above.
9-M14
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
[6] EASY
CH
ECKER
To
check
the
conditions
of
tractor
easily before
and during operation,
easy
checker combination
of
lamps on
the
easy
checker board
is
provided.
(1) Indication Items
1001
Pre-heat Indicator Lamp
When
the
key switch
is
in
the
"Preheat"
position,
the
pre-heat
indicator
lamp
illuminates.
I
t:31
Charge
Lamp
When the charging system
is
not
functioning
properly, this lamp illuminates.
I<>@{ol
Oil
Pressure
Lamp
When the engine oil pressure
is
low,
this
lamp illuminates.
~D~
~[o]I<>@{o1
CD
® ®
(1) Pre-heat
Indicator
Lamp
(2) Charge Lamp
(3) Oil Pressure
Lamp
B177F916
(2)
Low
Engine Oil Pressure
(1) Oil Pressure Switch
Low engine oil pressure
is
detected by
the
oil
switch installed in
the
lubricating
system
of
engine.
III Oil Pressure Switch
While oil pressure
is
high and the force applied
to
the diaphragm
(2)
is
larger than the spring tension,
the terminal contact
(1)
is
open separated from the
body contact
(3).
If
the pressure drops
below
approx.
49
kPa
(0.5 kgf/cm
2
,
7.1
psi),
the contact
closes.
(3) Body
Contact
(1)
Terminal
Contact
(2)
Diaphragm
C045F141
9-M15
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
[7]
GAUGE
®
lOA
I-----~----,
®
®
B177F917
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
The
fuel quantity and coolant
temperature
are
indicated
by
the ammeters.
The
ammeters indicate
each
amperate flowing through the fuel level
sensor
(7)
for
the fuel quantity detection and through the
coolant
temperature
sensor (8)
for
the
coolant
temperature detection.
(1) Main Switch
(2)
Fuse
(3) Fuel Gauge
(4)
Water
Tem perature
Gauge
(1) Fuel Quantity
(5) Slow Blow
Fuse
(6) Battery
(7) Fuel Level Sensor
(B)
Water
Temperature
Sensor
0329F068
(1) Float (2) Variable Resistor
(2) Coolant Temperature
•
Fuel
Level
Sensor
The
remaining fuel quantity
is
detected
by
the fuel
level
sensor
installed in the fuel tank and indicated
on the fuel gauge.
For
detection, a
float
and a
resistor
are
used.
As
the
float
(1) lowers,
the
resistance
of
the
variable resistor
(2)
varies.
The
relation between the
amount
of
fuel and the resistance
is
as
follows.
F
1/2
E(Remaining fuel
of
approx.
3.0
i,
0.79
U.S.
gal, 0.66Imp.gal)
1
to5
n
28.5
to
36.5 n
103
to
117 n
0329F069
(1) Terminal
(2) Insulator
(3) Body
(4) Thermistor
• Coolant Temperature Sensor
The
coolant temperature
sensor
is
installed
to
the
cylinder
head
of
engine,
and
its
tip
is
in touch
with
the
coolant.
It
contains a
thermistor
(4) whose
electrical resistance decreases
as
the
temperature
increases.
Current varies
with
changes
in
the
coolant
temperature, and the
increases
or
decreases
in
the
current move the pointer
of
gauge.
Characteristics
of
Thermistor
Temperature
Resistance
50°C
(122°F)
153.9 n
80°C
(176°F) 51.9 n
105°C
(221°F) 23.6 n
130°C
(266°F)
12.2
n
9-M16
SERVICING
CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING 9-51
SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS 9-54
CHECKING. DISASSEMBLING
AND
SERVICING 9-54
[1] BATTERY 9-54
CHECKING 9-54
SERVICING 9-56
[2] STARTING SYSTEM 9-57
CHECKING 9-57
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING 9-510
SERVICING 9-512
[3] ENGINE KEY SWITCH SHUT·OFF 5YSTEM 9-513
CHECKING 9-513
[4] CHARGING SYSTEM 9-514
CH
ECKI
NG
9-514
DI5A55EMBLING
AND
A55EMBLING 9-516
SERVICING 9-518
[5] LIGHTING SYSTEM 9-520
CHECKING 9-520
[6] EASY
CHECKER
~
9-523
CHECKING 9-523
[7] GAUGE 9-525
CHECKING 9-525
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
TROUBLESHOOTING
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
Symptom
Probable
Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
All
Electrical
..
Battery discharged
or
defective Recharge
or
Replace 9-54
Equipments Do
Not
..
Battery positive cable disconnected
or
Repair
or
Replace 9-54
Operate
improperly
connected
.. Battery negative cable disconnected
or
Repair
or
Replace 9-54
improperly
connected
.. Slow
blow
fuse
blown
Replace
-
Fuse
Blown
.. Short-circuited Repair
or
Replace
-
Frequently
BATTERY
Battery Discharges
..
Battery defective Recharge
or
Replace 9-54
Too Quickly
..
Dynamo defective Repair
or
Replace 9-514
..
Regulator defective Replace 9-514
..
Wiring
harness disconnectd
or
improperly Repair
or
Replace 9-514
connected (between battery positive
terminal
and regulator Bterminal, and
between regulator and dynamo)
..
Alternator
defective Repair
or
Replace
9-514
..
IC
Regulator defective Replace 9-517
..
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly Repair
or
Replace 9-515
connected (between battery positive
terminal and
alternator
Bterminal.
.. Cooling fan
belt
slipping Adjust tension
G-19
STARTING SYSTEM
Starter
Motor
..
Battery discharged
or
defective
Recharge
or
Replace 9-54
Does
Not
..
Slow
blow
fuse
blown
Replace
-
Operate
..
Safety switch improperly adjusted
or
Repair
or
Replace
G-14
defective
..
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly Repair
or
Replace
9-57
connected (between main switch
50
terminal
and safety switches, between safety switches
and starter motor, between battery positive
terminal
and starter motor)
..
Starter
motor
defective
Repair
or
Replace 9-510
..
Main
switch defective
Replace
9-57
Pre-heat Indicator
..
Battery discharged
or
defective
Recharge
or
Replace 9-54
Lamp Does
Not
Light
..
Slow
blow
fuse
blown
Replace
-
When
Main
Switch
is
..
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly
Repair
or
Replace 9-57
in Pre-heat Position
connected (between main switch 19 terminal
and pre-heat indicator, between pre-heat
indicator
and
glow
plugs)
..
Main
switch defective
Replace
9-57
..
Pre-heat indicator defective
Replace
9-59
9-51
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
ENGINE KEY SWITCH SHUT-OFF SYSTEM
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11770
Symptom
Probable
Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Engine Does
Not
..
Fuse
blown
(5A) Replace
-
Stop When
Main
..
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly Repair
or
Replace
9-513
Switch is Turned
Off
connected (between main switch
AC
terminal and fuel cut
off
solenoid)
..
Fuel
cut
off
solenoid defective Replace
-
Engine Does
Not
..
Fuel
cut
off
solenoid defective Replace
-
Start
CHARGING SYSTEM
Charging Lamp Does
..
Fuse
blown
(10A) Replace
-
Not
Light
When
..
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly Repair
or
Replace 9-514
Main Switch is
connected (between main switch
AC
Turned
ON
terminal
and panel board, between panel
board and regulator, between dynamo and
regulator)
..
Regulator defective Replace
-
..
Dynamo defective Repair
or
Replace
9-516
..
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly Repair
or
Replace
9-515
connected (between main switch
AC
terminal and panel board, between panel
board and alternator)
..
Alternator
defective Repair
or
Replace
9-515
Charging Lamp Does
..
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly Repair
or
Replace
9-514
Not
Go
Off
When
connected (between dynamo and regulator,
Engine
is
Running
between main switch
30
terminal and
regulator, between panel board and
regulator)
..
Dynamo defective Repair
or
Replace
9-516
..
Regulator defective Replace
-
..
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly Repair
or
Replace
9-515
connected (between main switch
30
terminal
and alternator, between panel board and
alternator)
..
Alternator
defective
Repair
or
Replace 9-515
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Head Light Does
Not
,
Fuse
blown
(1
OA)
Replace
-
Light
..
Bulb
blown
Replace
-
..
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly Repair
or
Replace
9-520
connected (between main switch
AC
terminal
and combination switch
B1
terminal,
between combination switch 1
terminal
and headlight)
Tail Light Does
Not
..
Fuse
blown
(10A)
Replace
-
Light
..
Bulb
blown
Replace
-
..
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly
Repair
or
Replace
9-521
connected (between main switch
AC
terminal
and combination switch
B1
terminal, between combination switch T
terminal
and
taillight)
9-52
B1700'B2100·B2400 WSM, 11770
9
ELECTRICAL
5Y5TEM
Symptom
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Hazard
Light
Does
•
Fuse
blown
(10A) Replace
-
Not
Light
•
Bulb
blown
Replace
-
•
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly
Repair
or
Replace
9-521
connected (between main switch
AC
terminal
and hazard
unit,between
hazard
unit
and combination switch 82
terminal,
between combination switch R
or
Lterminal
and hazard lights)
•
Hazard
unit
defective Replace 9-522
•
Combination switch defective Replace 9-520
Hazard
Indicator
•
Bulb
blown
Replace
-
Lamp Does
Not
Light
•
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly
Repair
or
Replace
9-521
connected (between combination switch R
or
L
terminal
and panel board)
Hazard
Light
Does
• Hazard
unit
defective
Replace 9-522
Not
Flicker
EASY
CH
ECKER
Oil Pressure Lamp
•
Eng
ine oiI
pressu
re
too
low
Repair engine
-
Lights Up
When
•
Engine oil insufficient Replenish G-8
Engine
is
Running
•
Oil pressure switch defective
Replac~'
-
•
5hort
circuit between oil pressure switch lead Repair 9-524
and
chassis
• Circuit in panel board defective
Replace
9-523
Oil Pressure Lamp
•
Bulb
blown
Replace
-
Does
Not
Light
•
Oil pressure switch defective Replace
-
When
Main
Switch
is
•
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly
Repair
or
Replace
9-524
Turned
ON
and connected (between panel board and oil
Engine is
Not
pressure switch)
Running
• Circuit in panel board defective
Replace
9-523
GAUGES
Symptom Probable
Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Fuel Gauge Does
Not
•
Fuel gauge defective Replace
9-526
Function
•
Fuel level sensor defective Replace
9-525
•
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly
Repair
or
Replace 9-525
connected (between panel board and fuel
level sensor)
• Circuit in panel board defective
Replace
-
Coolant
•
Coolant temperature gauge defective
Replace 9-526
Temperature Gauge
•
Coolant
temperature
sensor defective
Replace 9-526
Does
Not
Function
•
Wiring
harness disconnected
or
improperly
Repair or Replace
9-526
connected (between panel board and
coolant
temperature
sensor)
• Circuit in panel board defective
Replace
-
9-53
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS
STARTER
MOTOR
Item Factory Specification Allowable Limit
Mica
Undercut
0.5t01.0mm
0.2mm
0.020
to
0.039
in.
0.0079 in.
ALTERNATOR
Slip
Ring
O.D.
14.4
mm
12.8
mm
0.567
in.
0.504 in.
Brush
Length
10.5
mm
8.4mm
0.413
in.
0.331
in.
CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING
AND
SERVICING
A
CAUTION
..
To
avoid accidental short circuit,
be
sure
to
attach the positive cable
to
the positive terminal before the
ground cable
is
attached
to
the
negative terminal.
III IMPORTANT
CD
If
the
tractor
is
to
be
operated
for
a short time
without
battery (using a slave battery
for
starting),
use
additional current (lights)
while
engine
is
running and insulate terminal
of
battery.
If
this
advice
is
disregarded, damage
to
alternator or dynamo and regulator may result.
III
NOTE
CD
In this section,
when
measuring resistance, voltage and amperage, leads
of
ohmmeter, voltmeter and
ammeter are represented by - marks in figure.
[1] BATTERY
CHECKING
,--F_ac_to_ry_s_pe_c_.
I_Le_s_s
t_h_an_0_.1_V
_
Battery Voltage
1.
Stop the engine and turn the main switch off.
2.
Connect the
COM
(-)
lead
of
the voltmeter
to
the battery's
negative
terminal
post and
the
(+)
lead
to
the
positive
terminal post, and measure the battery voltage.
3.
If
the battery voltage
is
less
than the factory specifications,
check the battery condition.
(See
the next page.)
More than
12
V
Factory
spec.
Battery voltage
Battery Terminal Connection
1.
Turn the main switch on, and turn on
the
head light.
2.
Measure the voltage
with
a voltmeter
across
the battery's
positive
terminal
post and
the
cable
terminal,
and
the
voltage
across
the battery's negative terminal post and the
chassis.
3.
If
the measurement
exceeds
the factory specifications, clean
the battery terminal
posts
and cable clamps, and
tighten
them firmly.
0309F091
9-S4
81700·82100·82400 WSM, 11770
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
At
an
electrolyte
tern
perature
of
20°C (68
OF)
C022F006
Specific
Gravity
1.260
Sp.
Gr.
1.230
Sp.
Gr.
1.200
Sp.
Gr.
1.170
Sp.
Gr.
1.140Sp.Gr.
1.110
Sp.
Gr.
State
of
Charge
100
% Charged
75
% Charged
50
% Charged
25
% Charged
Very
Little
Useful Capacity
Discharged
Battery Specific Gravity
A CAUTION
• Keep electrolyte away from eyes, hands and clothes.
If
you
are spattered
with
it,
wash
it
away completely
with
water.
1.
Check
the specific gravity
of
the electrolyte in each cell
with
a
hydrometer.
2.
When the electrolyte temperature differs from
that
at
which
the hydrometer
was
calibrated, correct
the
specific gravity
reading
following
the
formula
mentioned in (Reference)
below.
3.
If
the specific gravity
is
less
than
1.215
(after
it
is
corrected
for
temperature), charge or replace the battery.
4.
If
the specific gravity differs between any
two
cells by more
than 0.05, replace the battery.
III
NOTE
• Hold
the
hydrometer tube vertical
without
removing
it
from
the
electrolyte.
• Do
not
suck
too
much electrolyte
into
the tube.
•
Allow
the
float
to
more freely and hold
the
hydrometer
at
eye level.
• The
hydrometer
reading must
be
taken
at
the
highest
electrolyte level.
(Reference)
• Specific gravity slightly varies
with
temperature.
To
be
exact,
the
specific gravity
decreases
by
0.0007
with
an
increase
of
1
°C
(0.0004
with
an
increase
of
1
oF)
in temperature, and
increases by 0.0007
with
a
decreases
of
1
°C
(0.0004
with
a
decrease
of
1°F).
Therefore, using 20°C
(68
OF)
as
a reference,
the
specific
gravity reading must
be
corrected
by
the
following
formula:
• Specific gravity at 20°C = Measured value + 0.0007 x
(electrolyte temperature -
20
0c)
• Specific gravity at 68
OF
= Measured value + 0.0004 x
(electrolyte temperature - 68
OF)
9-S5
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
SERVICING
Table 1
[with
AC
Dynamo]
Tractor
Battery
Type
Volts Capacity
at
Model
(V)
5H.R
(A.H)
B1700
B2100
50B24L(S)-MF
12
36
B2400
Tractor
Reserve Cold Normal
Model
Capacity
Cranking
Char~ing
(min)
Amps Rate A)
B1700
B2100
71
390 4.5
B2400
Table 2
[with
Alternator]
Tractor
Battery
Type
Volts Capacity
at
Model
(V) 5H.R(A.H)
B2100
55B24L(S)-MF
12
36
B2400
Tractor
Reserve Cold
Normal
Model
Capacity
Cranking
Char~ing
(min)
Amps
Rate A)
B2100
79
433
4.5
B2400
(Reference)
Self-discharge Rate
Temperature
Self-discharge rate
30
°c
(86
OF)
Approx.1.0
% per
day
20
°c
(68
oF)
Approx.
0.5 % per day
10
°c
(50
oF)
Approx.
0.25 % per day
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770
Recharging
A CAUTION
III
When
the
battery is being activated, hydrogen and oxygen
gases in
the
battery are extremely explosive. Keep open
sparks and flames
away
from
the
battery
at
all
times,
especially when charging the battery.
III
When charging battery, remove battery
vent
plugs.
• When disconnecting the cable
from
the
battery, start
with
the
negative terminal first. When connecting
the
cable
to
the
battery, start
with
the
positive terminal first.
III
Never check battery charge
by
placing a metal object across
the
posts.
Use
a
voltmeter
or
hydrometer.
1) Slow Charging
1.
Add distilled
water
if
the
electrolyte level
is
low.
When
charging,
the
amount
of
electrolyte should
be
slightly
lower
than
the
specified level
to
prevent overflow.
2.
Connect
the
battery
to
the
charging
unit,
following
the
manufacturer's instructions.
3.
As
the
electrolyte generates
gas
while
charging, remove all
port
caps.
4.
The
electrolyte temperature must
not
exceed
40°C
(10S
OF)
during
charging.
If
it
exceed 40°C
(1
05
OF),
decrease
the
charging amperage
or
stop charging
for
a while.
5.
When charging several batteries in series, charge
at
the
rate
ofthe
smallest battery in
the
line.
III
NOTE
III
Slow charger operation
differs
with
the
type
used. For
details, refer
to
the
manufacturer's instructions.
2)
Quick Charging
1.
Determine
the
proper charging current and charging
time
with
the
tester attached
to
the
quick charger.
2.
Determine
the
proper charging current
as
1/1
of
the
battery
capacity.
If
the battery capacity exceeds
50
Ah, consider
50
A
as
the
maximum.
III
NOTE
III
Quick charger operation
differs
with
the
type
used. For
details, refer
to
the
manufacturer's instructions.
Directions
for
Storage
1.
When storing the tractor
for
long periods
of
ti
me, remove
the
battery from tractor, adjust the electrolyte
to
the
proper
level and store in a dry place
out
of
direct sunlight.
2.
The
battery self-discharges
while
it
is
stored.
Recharge
it
once every three months in
hot
seasons
and once
every
six
months in cold
seasons.
9-56
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,
11770
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
[2] STARTING SYSTEM
CHECKING
(1)
Main Switch
Main Switch
1.
Remove
the panel board, and remove the main switch.
2.
Perform the
following
checkings
1)
to
5).
1) Connector Voltage
1.
Measure the voltage
with
a voltmeter
across
the connector
30
terminal and
chassis.
2.
If
the voltage differs from the battery voltage
(11
to
14
V),
the
wiring
harness
is
faulty.
Approx. battery
voltage
Connector
30
terminal-
chassis
Voltage
From
Battery
Positive
--
--7::!:-;c-+--t.-FI---,
Terminal
Main
Switch
B177F918
B177F919
2)
Main Switch Key at
Off
Position
1.
Turn the main switch
off.
2.
Measure
the
resistance
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
30
terminal and the
AC
terminal,
30
terminal and
50
terminal,
30terminal and 19terminal.
3.
If
infinity
is
not
indicated, the contacts
ofthe
main switch are
faulty.
30
-AC
Infinity
Resistance
30
-50
Infinity
30
-
19
Infinity
9-57
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
B1700'B2100'B2400
WSM,11770
3)
Main Switch Key
at
ON
Position
1.
Turn
the
main switch on.
2.
Measure
the
resistance
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
30
terminal and
the
AC
terminal.
3.
If
0 ohm
is
not
indicated, the
30
-
AC
contacts
of
the
main
switch are faulty.
n
B177F920
I
Resista
nce
30 -
AC
Oohm
B177F921
4)
Main Switch Key
at
PREHEAT
Position
1.
Turn and hold
the
main switch key
at
the
PREHEAT
position.
2.
Measure
the
resistance
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
30
terminal and
the
19 terminal, and measure
the
resistance
across
the
30
terminal and
the
AC
terminal.
3.
If
0 ohm
is
not
indicated, these contacts
of
the
main switch
are faulty.
30
-19
Oohm
30
-AC
B177F922
5)
Main Switch Key
at
START
Position
1.
Turn and hold
the
main switch key
at
the
START
position.
2.
Measure
the
resistance
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
30
terminal and
the
19 terminal,
across
the
30
terminal and
the
50
terminal,and
across
the
30
terminal and
the
AC
terminal.
3.
If
0 ohm
is
not
indicated, these contacts
of
the
main switch
are faulty.
30
-19
Resistance
30
-50
Oohm
30
-AC
~
Key
30
AC
19
50
position
OFF
..
ON
-
-
PREHEAT
-
-
START
-
9-S8
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11770
From Main Switch
19
Terminal
r and Pre-heat Indicator Lamp
Glow Plugs
,~
8177F915
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
Pre-heating
1)
Lead
Terminal Voltage
1.
Disconnect the
wiring
lead from the
glow
plug terminal
after·
turning
the
main switch off.
2.
Turn
the
main switch key
to
the
PREHEAT
position, and
measure
the
voltage
across
the
lead terminal and
the
chassis.
3.
Turn
the
main switch key
to
the
START
position, and measure
the
voltage
with
a voltmeter
across
the
lead terminal and
the
chassis.
4.
If
the
voltage
at
either
position
differs
from
the
battery
voltage, the
wiring
harness
or
main switch
is
faulty.
Main switch key
at
Voltage
PREHEAT
(Lead
terminal
chassis)
Main switch key
at
Approx.
battery
voltage
START
2)
GlowPlug
1.
Disconnect
the
leads from
the
glow
plugs.
2.
Measure
the
resistance
with
an ohmmeter
across
the
glow
plug terminal and
the
chassis.
3.
If
0 ohm
is
indicated,
the
screw
at
the
tip
of
the
glow
plug
and the housing are short-circuited.
4.
Ifthe
reference value
is
not
indicated,
the
glow
plug
is
faulty.
0329F134
Glow plug resistance
Reference value
Approx.
0.9 ohms
Safety Switch
1.
Remove
the
safety switch leads.
2.
Connect
the
ci
rcuit tester
to
the
safety switch leads.
3.
Measure
the
resistance between leads.
4.
If
the
safety switch
is
defective, replace it.
When switch push
Oohm
Resistance
is
pushed
(Across switch terminal)
When switch push
is
released
Infinity
9-59
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
Motor
Test
1.
Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery.
2.
Disconnect the battery positive cable and
the
leads from
the
starter.
3.
Remove
the starter from the engine.
4.
Connect the jumper lead from the battery positive terminal
post
to
the Bterminal (2), and from the B terminal
(2)
to
the
Sterminal
(1).
5.
Connect a jumper lead momentarily between
the
battery
negative terminal post and the M terminal
(3).
6.
If
the motor does
not
run, check the motor.
A CAUTION
.. Secure the starter
to
prevent
it
from jumping up and
down
while
testing the motor.
(1)
STerminal
(2)
BTerminal
(3) M Term inal
B177P253
Magnetic Switch Test
1.
Connect the
jumper
lead from the battery positive terminal
post
to
the Sterminal.
2.
The
pinion gear should pop
out,
when
a
jumper
lead
is
connected between
the
battery negative terminal post and
the M terminal.
3.
If
the pinion gear does
not
pop
out,
check
the
magnetic
switch.
III
NOTE
•
The
test should be carried
out
for
a short
time,
about 3
to
5
seconds.
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING
Magnetic Switch
1.
Disconnect the connecting lead
(3).
2.
Remove
the mounting screws, and separate
the
magnetic
switch
(2)
from the
front
bracket (1).
(1)
Front Bracket
(2) Magnetic Switch
9-510
(3)
Connecting
Lead
B1700·B21
00·B2400
WSM,
11770
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
Rear
Bracket
1.
Remove
the
mounting screws (1).
2.
Remove
the
rear bracket
(2).
Brush Holder
1.
Remove
the
mounting
screws
(1).
2.
Remove
the
brush holder
(3)
from
the
rear bracket (2).
II
NOTE
• Before disassembling,
put
the
parting marks on
the
yoke
and
front
bracket.
Armature and Yoke
1.
Draw
out
the
armature (3), ball
(2)
and
the
yoke (1)
from
the
front
bracket.
Shaft Assembly
(with
Overrunning Clutch)
1.
Remove
the
gasket A (7), gasket B
(2)
and
the
plate (1).
2.
Draw
out
the
shaft assembly
(4)
from
the
front
bracket (5).
(When reassembling)
• Install
the
lever (3),
noting
its direction.
B177P256
B177P257
B177P258
B177P259
3
(1) Screw
(1) Screw
(2) Rear Bracket
(1) Yoke
(2) Ball
(1) Plate
(2) Gasket B
(3) Lever
(4) Shaft
Assem
bly
9-S
11
(2) Rear Bracket
(3)
Brush
Holder
(3)
Armature
(5) Front Bracket
(6) Overrunning Clutch
(7)
GasketA
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
SERVICING
Staining
or
Burning
of
Commutator
1.
Check
to
see
if
the commutator surface
is
stained
or
burnt.
2.
If
it
is
burnt, grind
off
with
a fine-grain sandpaper.
Factory
spec.
0.5to
1.0
mm
Mica undercut
0.020
to
0.039 in.
Allowable
limit
0.2
mm
0.008 in.
(a)
Bad
(b) Good
(3)
Depth
of
Mica
(1)
Mica
(2)
Segment
Mica Undercut
1.
Check
to
see
the
mica undercut.
2.
Ifthe
mica
is
less
than
the
allowable
limit,
correct
with
a saw
blade.
As
the edge
of
the segment
will
be
rough, chamfer it.
(a) (b)
-~
....:.
".
:;"-.
~
=-~.
~
~
(a)-
-.
CP
rp-
C022F058
(1)
Allowable Limit Line
Grounding
of
Armature Coil
1.
Measure
the
resistance
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
commutator and
the
armature shaft.
2.
If
infinity
is
not
indicate, replace it.
Infinity
Commutator -
Armature
Resistance
Brush Wear
1.
If
the
conduct face
of
the
brush
is
dirty
or dusty, clean
it
with
sandpaper.
2.
Visually inspect the brush wear.
3.
Ifthe
brush
is
worn
more than allowable
limit,
replace
it.
B177F923
Grounding
of
Brush Holder
1.
Measure
the
resistance
with
an ohmmeter
across
the
brush
holder and
the
holder support.
2.
If
infinity
is
not
indicated, replace it.
Resistance
Brush
holder -
Holder support
Infinity
9-512
81700·82100'82400 WSM,11770
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
[3] ENGINE KEY SWITCH SHUT-OFF SYSTEM
CHECKING
Terminal3 (white) - Terminal2
Approx. 0.4 ohms
(black)
Resistance
Terminal 1 (red)
- Terminal2
Approx.
1.5
ohms
(black)
3)
Fuel
Cut
Off
Solenoid Resistance
1.
Disconnect the connector
of
fuel
cut-off
solenoid.
2.
Measure
the
resistances
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
terminal 3 (white) and terminal 2 (black),
across
the terminal
1 (red) and terminal 2 (black).
3.
If
the resistances are 0 ohm or infinity, fuel
cut-off
solenoid
is
faulty.
Fuel
Cut
Off
Solenoid
1)
Lead
Terminal Voltage
1.
Disconnect the connector
of
fuel
cut-off
solenoid.
2.
Turn the main switch
"ON".
3.
Measure the voltage
with
voltmeter
across
the
terminal
3
(red, black)
ofthe
wiring
harness
side and the
chassis.
4.
If
the battery voltage
(11
to
14
V)
is
not
indicated, the fuse,
the main switch or
wiring
harness
are faulty.
Approx.
battery
voltage
Terminal3 (red, black)
-
chassis
Voltage
2)
Fuel
Cut
Off
Solenoid Test
1.
Disconnect the lead
from
the
fuel cut
off
solenoid
after
turning
the main switch off.
2.
Connect jumper leads from the battery positive terminal
to
the fuel cut
off
solenoid
terminal
1 (red), and
from
the
battery
negative
terminal
to
the
fuel
cut
off
solenoid
terminal 2 (black).
3.
If
the solenoid plunger
is
not
attracted,
the
fuel cut
off
solenoid
is
faulty.
9-513
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
[4]
CHARGING SYSTEM
CHECKING
III
AC
Dynamo
Battery Positive Cord
C022F017
C022F028
B1700'B2100'B2400 WSM, 11770
Battery Charging Current
1.
After
starting
the
engine, disconnect
the
battery
positive
cord
(+),
and connect an
ammeter
and
voltmeter.
Then
switch on all electrical loads (such
as
headlights) and measure
the
charging current.
III
NOTE
.. Connect an ammeter
only
after
starting
the
engine.
.. When
the
electrical loads
is
considerably
low
or
the
battery
is
fully
charged,
the
specified reading may
not
be obtained.
Current
14to
15
A
Factory spec.
Dynamospeed
5200 r.p.m
Dynamo No-load Voltage
1.
Disconnect the lead
wi
res
from
the
dynamo.
2.
Start
the
engine, and check
the
generating voltage
of
the
dynamo.
Voltage
14to
15
V
Factory spec.
Dynamo speed
5200 r.p.m
5
4
Regulator
B177F925
3
Continuity
across Regulator's Terminals
1.
Remove
the
regulator coupler.
2.
Check
with
a tester
whether
the
regulator
is
in
optimum
condition
or
not.
III Check Table
III
NOTE
.. Type
to
use a high-resistance tester
as
far
as
possible.
.. The
judgement
should
be
as
below
table.
"ON"
if
the
indicator moves, otherwise "OFF"
(1) Sky Blue
(2) Sky Blue
(3)
Red
(4)
Yellow
(5) Green
(6) Black
~
Cord colours
terminal
Tester
Sky
Blue Sky Blue
Red
Yellow
Green Black
-terminal
Sky Blue
~
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Sky Blue
OFF
~
ON
OFF OFF
OFF
Cord
Red
OFF OFF
~
OFF OFF
OFF
colours
Yellow
ON
ON ON
~
OFF
ON
Green
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
~
OFF
Black
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
~
9-S14
The Correct Voltage Output
[INCORRECT]
3TBMAF9P020A
[CORRECT]
3TBMAF9P020A
Dynamo No-load Voltage
3.
Disconnect the lead wires from the dynamo.
4.
Start the engine, and check the generating voltage
of
the d namo.
Factory
spec.
Voltage
B1700'B21 00'B2400 WSM, 11770
II
Alternator
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
Output
Current
1.
Disconnect the connector
(2)
from the alternator.
2.
Connect the leads
with
the terminals
as
shown in
the
figures.
3.
Start the engine and switch on all electrical loads
(such
as
head lights).
4.
Set
the engine
speed
at
approx.
2250
rpm, and measure
the
output
current.
5.
If
the measurement
is
less
than the factory specification,
the
alternator
is
defective.
6.
Run
the
engine
at
idling
speed
(low
rpm)
to
see
if
the
ammeter
reads a negative
(-)
value
(discharge). Then
increase the engine rpm
to
make
sure
the ammeter reads a
positive (
+) value (charge).
Alternator No-load Voltage
1.
Disconnect the connector
(2)
from the alternator.
2.
Connect
the
leads
with
the terminals
as
shown in
the
figures.
3.
Startthe engine and set its
speed
approx. 2250 rpm.
4.
Disconnect the battery negative cord from
the
battery
(5).
5.
Measure the voltage
across
the alternator Bterminal and
the
chassis.
6.
If
the measurement
is
less
than
the
factory
specification,
disassemble the alternator and check the
IC
regulator.
B022F045
(1)
Alternator
(2)
Alternator
2P
Connector
IG
(RY)
(3)
Bulb
(4)
Main
Switch
(5)
Battery
(6) Load
Output
current
Voltage
Factory spec.
Factory spec.
More
than
40 A
14.2
to
14.8 V
(at
25°C, 77°F)
B022F044
(1)
Alternator
(2)
Alternator
2P
Connector
(3) Bulb
(4)
Main
Switch
(5)
Battery
(6) Load
(Reference)
.. Once the engine
has
started,
the
alternator
temperature
rises
quickly up
to
an
ambient temperature
of
70
to
90°C
(158
to
194
OF).
As
the
temperature
goes
higher
than
50°C
(122°F),
the alternator voltage slowly drops;
at
higher than
100°C
(212°F),
it
drops by about 1
V.
9-S15
Stator
1.
Remove
the
nut
(3)
and separate
the
stator
compo
(4).
2.
Unscrew the screws
(1)
and remove the stator (2).
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
DIASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING
II
AC Dynamo
(1) Screw
(2) Stator
B177P306
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
(3)
Nut
(4) StatorComp.
Rotor
1.
Tap
out
the
shaft
(1)
from
the
rotor
(3).
(When reassembling)
.. Take care
the
direction
of
the collar (4),
the
flat
side should
face
to
the
pulley
(2)
side.
B177P307
II
Alternator
2
(1) Shaft
(2) Pulley
(3) Rotor
(4) Collar
(5) Bearings
(6) Collar
C144F031
Pulley
1.
Secure
the
hexagonal end
of
the pulley shaft
with
a double-
. ended ratchet wrench
as
shown in the figure, loosen
the
nut
with
a socket wrench and remove it.
58.3
to
78.9
N·m
Tightening
torque
Pulley lock
nut
5.95
to
8.05 kgf·m
43.0
to
58.2 ft-Ibs
Rear
End
Cover
1.
Unscrew
the
three rear end cover screws and
the
terminal B
nut
and remove
the
rear end cover.
9-S16
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
Brush Holder
1.
Unscrew
the
two
screws
holding
the
brush
holder
and
remove
the
brush holder.
C144F032
IC
Regulator
1.
Unscrew
the
three screws holding
the
IC
regulator
(1)
and
remove it.
(1)
IC
Regulator
C144F033
Rectifier
1.
Remove
the
four
screws
holding
the
rectifier
(1) and
the
stator lead wires.
(1)
Rectifier
C144F034
(1) Rear End
Frame
Rear
End
rrame
1.
Remove
the
two
nuts and
two
screws holding
the
drive end
frame and
the
rear end frame.
2.
Remove
the
rear end frame (1).
Rotor
1.
Press
out
the
rotor
(2)
from drive end frame
(4).
II
IMPORTANT
.. Take special care
not
to
drop
the
rotor
and damage
the
slip
ring
orfan,
etc.
(3) Block
(4)
Drive
End
Frame
(1)
Press
(2)
Rotor
C095F148
2
9-S17
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
C144F036
B1700·B21
00·B2400
WSM,
11770
Retainer Plate
1.
Remove the screws holding
the
retainer plate and remove
the
retainer plate
(1).
(1)
Retainer
Plate
Bearing
atthe
Slip Ring Side
1.
Lightly secure the
rotor
(1)
with
a vise
(2)
to
prevent damage
and remove
the
bearing using
with
puller (4).
Bearing on the Drive
End
Side
1.
Press
out
the
bearing from drive end frame
(4)
using
with
press
(1) and
jig
(2).
(1) Press (3) Block
(2) Jig (4)
Drive
End
Frame
2
C095F149
C095F150
SERVICING
4
(1)
Rotor
(2) Vise
(3)
Bearing
(4)
Puller
0087F091
Bearing
1.
Check
the
bearing
for
smooth rotation.
2.
If
it
does
not
rotate smoothly, replace it.
9-518
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11770
II
Alternator
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
Stator
1.
Measure the resistance
with
an
ohmmeter
across
each lead
of
the stator
coi
I.
2.
If
the
measurement
is
not
within
factory
specification,
replace it.
3.
Check
the continuity
across
each
stator coil lead and core
with
an
ohmmeter.
4.
If
infinity
is
not
indicated, replace it.
0109F317
Resistance
Factory
spec.
Less
than
1.0
ohms
C095F153
C095F154
C095F155
Rotor
1.
Measure the resistance
across
the slip rings.
2.
If
the resistance
is
not
the factory specification, replace it.
3.
Check
the continuity
across
the slip ring and core
with
a
an
ohmmeter.
4.
If
infinity
is
not
indicated, replace it.
Ie--R_e_si_st_an_c_e
I_F_ac_t_or_y_sp_e_c_.
1_2_.9_o_h_m_s
_
Slip Ring
1.
Check
the slip ring
for
score.
2.
If
scored, correct
with
an
sand
paper
or
on a lathe.
3.
Measure the outside diameter
of
slip
ring
with
a vernier
caliper.
4.
Ifthe
measurement exceeds the allowable
limit,
replace it.
Factory
spec.
14.4
mm
0.567 in.
Slip ring
0.0.
12.8mm
Allowable
limit
0.504 in.
Brush Wear
1.
Measure the length
of
brush
with
a vernier caliper.
2.
Ifthe
measurement
is
less
than allowable limit, replace it.
3.
Make
sure
that
the brush moves smoothly.
4.
If
the brush
is
defective, replace it.
Factory
spec.
10.5mm
0.413 in.
8rush length
8.4mm
Allowable limit
0.331
in.
C144F037
Rectifier
1.
Check
the continuity
across
each
diode
of
rectifier
with
an
ohmmeter.
2.
The
rectifier
is
normal
if
the diode in the rectifier conducts in
one direction and does
not
conduct in the reverse direction.
II
IMPORTANT
• Do
not
use
a
500
V megger
for
measuring because
it
will
destroy the rectifier.
9-S19
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
81700'82100·82400 WSM,11770
0109F323
IC
Regulator
1.
Check
the continuity
across
the
Bterminal and
the
Fterminal
of
IC
regulator
with
an
ohmmeter.
2.
The
IC
regulator
is
normal
if
the
conducts in one direction
and does
not
conduct in
the
reverse direction.
11IIII
IMPORTANT
..
Do
not
use
a
500
V megger
for
measuring because
it
will
destroy
the
rectifier.
L1
12V
0
J.'W
C095F158
L
~
IG
IC
Regulator Test
1.
Connect the
IC
regulator unit, variable
DC
source, voltmeter,
lamps and etc.
so
that
they form a circuit
as
shown in
the
figure.
(SW1
and
SW2
shall be kept in
the
"OFF" position.)
2. Adjust
the
source voltage
to
12
V.
3.
Turn
SW1
"ON"
check
if
L1
(charge lamp substitution)
is
lit
brilliantly
and
L2
(rotor
coil substitution)
is
dimly.
4.
Then,
turn
SW2
"ON"
while
SW1
is
still turned
"ON".
Check
if
L1
is
turns "OFF" and
L2
is
lit
brilliantly.
5.
While keeping
SW1
and
SW2
in
the
"ON"
position, raise
the
variable
DC
source voltage gradually from 12 V and check
if
the
L2
lamp
is
turned "OFF"
at
a voltage
of
13.9
to
15.1 V
at
25°C
(45
OF).
11IIII
IMPORTANT
It
A
wrong
connection in
the
IC
regulator
may
destroy
the
regulator in a short
time,
therefore,
inspection
of
the
IC
regulator
is
to
be
done
only
after
the
wiring
diagram in
the
maintenance standard
has
been
thoroughly
studied.
[5] LIGHTING SYSTEM
CHECKING
(1)
Combination Switch
1) Connector Voltage
1.
Turn
the
main switch on, and measure
the
voltage
with
a
voltmeter
across
the
connector
B1
terminal and
the
chassis.
2.
If
the
voltage differs
from
the
battery voltage,
the
wiring
harness or main switch
is
faulty.
Combination Switch
1.
Remove
the
panel board, and disconnect
the
combination
switch connector.
2.
Remove
the
combination
switch
(1) and
perform
the
following
checkings 1)
to
6).
Approx. battery voltage
81
-
Chassis
Voltage
(1)
Combination Switch
8177F926
From
Main
Switch
__
--F=r+'t----1
ACTerminal
9-520
B1700·B21
00·B2400
WSM,
11770
B177F927
B177F927
B177F928
B177F928
B177F928
82
82
82
82
82
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
2)
Headlight Switch Continuity When Setting Switch Knob
at
OFF
Position
1.
Set
the I
ight
switch knob
to
the
OFF
position.
2.
Measure the resistances
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
81
terminal and 1 terminal, and
across
the
81
terminal and the T
terminal.
3.
If
infinity
is
not
indicated, the combination switch
is
faulty.
Resistance
B1-1
(Switch knob
at
OFF
Infinity
position)
B1-T
3)
Headlight Switch Continuity When Setting Switch Knob
at
ON
Position
1.
Measure
the
resistance
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
81
terminal and 1 terminal, and
across
the
81
terminal and T
terminal.
2.
If
0 ohm
is
not
indicated, the combination switch
is
faulty.
Resistance
B1-1
(Switch knob
at
ON
Oohm
position)
B1-T
4)
Hazard Switch Continuity When Setting Switch Knob
at
OFF
Position
1.
Set
the hazard switch knob
to
the
OFF
position.
2.
Measure
the
resistances
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
82
terminal and L
terminal,
and across 82
terminal
and R
terminal.
3.
If
infinity
is
not
indicated, the combination switch
is
faulty.
Resistance
B2-L
(Switch knob
at
OFF
Infinity
position)
B2-R
5)
Hazard Switch Continuity When Setting Switch Knob
at
1
Position
1.
Set
the hazard switch knob
to
the 1 position.
2.
Measure
the
resistance
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
82
terminal and Rterminal.
3.
If
0 ohm
is
not
indicated, the combination switch
is
faulty.
Resistance
B2-R
Oohm
(Switch knob
at
1
position)
B2-L
Infinity
6)
Hazard Switch Continuity When Setting Switch Knob
at
2
Position
1.
Set
the hazard switch knob
to
the 2 position.
2.
Measure
the
resistance
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
82
terminal and Lterminal.
3.
If 0 ohm
is
not
indicated, the combination switch
is
faulty.
Resistance
B2-L
Oohm
(Switch knob
at
2
position)
B2-R
Infinity
9-S21
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
Hazard Unit
1} Connector Voltage
1.
Disconnect the connector from the hazard
unit
after turning
the main switch off.
2.
Measure the voltage
with
a voltmeter
across
the connector 8
terminal and Eterminal.
3.
If
the voltage differs from
the
battery voltage,
the
main
switch, fuse or wiring
harness
is
faulty.
___
V_ol_ta_g_e
B_-_E
I
Approx.
battery
voltage
I
(1) Hazard
Unit
8
From
Main
,-j
,~:--
~
Switch
E 8
Terminal
8
2
B177F932
2}
Hazard UnitTest
1.
Remove
the panel board.
2.
Dosconnect the connector and remove the hazard unit.
3.
Connect jumper leads from the 82 terminal
to
the bulb, and
from the bulb
to
the battery negative terminal.
4.
Connect jumper lead from
the
8 terminal
to
the
battery
positive terminal.
5.
Connect jumper lead from
the
E terminal
to
the
battery
negative terminal.
6.
Ifthe
bulb
does
not flicker, the hazard
unit
is
faulty.
(1) Hazard
Unit
(2)
Battery
(12V)
(3) Bulb
B177F933
9-522
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
[6]
EASY
CHECKER
CHECKING
Easy
Checker
1.
Remove
the panel board and disconnect the connector from
it.
2.
Turn the main switch on.
3.
Measure the voltage
with
a voltmeter
across
the
terminal
(Red-Yellow) and the earth terminal (Black).
4.
If
the voltage differs from the battery voltage, the
wiring
harness,
fuses
and main switch should
be
checked.
Charging Circuit (Panel Board and Wiring Harness)
B177F934
III
AC
Dynamo
1.
Remove
the panel board from tractor.
2.
Disconnect
the
6-P
connector
from
the
regulator
after
turning
the main switch
off.
3.
Turn the main switch on and connect a
jumper
lead from
the
wiring
harness connector terminal (Black)
to
the
chassis.
4.
If
the charge lamp does
not
light, the panel board circuit,
regulator,
wiring
harness,
or
fuse
is
fault.
(1) Regulator
III Alternator
1.
Disconnect
the
2-P
connector
from
the
alternator
after
turning
the main switch
off.
2.
Turn the main switch on and connect a
jumper
lead from
the
wiring
harness connector terminal (white, red)
to
the
chassis.
3.
If
the charge lamp does
not
light, the panel board circuit,
alternator,
wiring
harness
or
fuse
is
fault.
(1)
Alternator
From
..-Charge
Lamp
~r-
f-f-
.
[1-1-
'-L-
-'-
F
=
-From
Charge
~~~
Lamp
B177F935
9-523
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
_--.-
From Oil
Pressure
Lamp
B177F936
B177F937
From Main Switch 19 Terminal
r and Pre-heat Indicator Lamp
Glow Plugs
<>~
B177F915 -
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
Engine Oil Pressure Switch
1)
Panel
Board and Wiring Harness
1.
Disconnect the lead from the engine oil pressure switch
after
turning
the main switch off.
2.
Turn the main switch on and connect a
jumper
lead from the
lead terminal
to
the
chassis.
3.
If the engine oil pressure indicator lamp does
not
light, the
panel board circuit or the
wiring
harness
is
faulty.
(1) Engine Oil
Pressure
Switch
2)
Switch Continuity
1.
Measure the resistance
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the switch
terminal and the
chassis.
2.
If 0 ohm
is
not
indicated in the normal state, the switch
is
faulty.
3.
If
infinity
is
not
indicated
at
pressure over 4.9
kPa
(0.5
kg/cm
2
,
7 psi), the switch
is
faulty.
Resistance
In
normal state
Oohm
(Switch
terminal-
At
pressure over approx.
Chassis)
4.9
kPa
(0.5 kgf/cm
2
,
7
psi)
Infinity
Glow
Plug
1.
Disconnect the lead from the
glow
plug.
2.
Connect the tester positive cable
to
the
glow
plug lead and
negative one
to
the
chassis.
3.
Measure its voltage
with
a voltmeter, after
turning
the main
switch
to
the preheating or starting position.
4.
If
its voltage
is
not
approximately the battery one, check the
main switch or
wiring
harness.
9-524
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
Monitor
Lamp
(for
Charge, Engine Oil Pressure, Pre-heat
and Hazard)
1.
After
removing the panel board from tractor, remove
the
plate behind the panel.
2.
Remove
the
each
lamp.
3.
Measure the lamp resistance.
4.
If
it
is
infinity, replace the lamp
with
new.
Fuel
Level Sensor
1)
Lead
Terminal Voltage
1.
Remove
the
panel board and disconnect the connector
from
the fuel gauge
unit
after
turning
the main switch
off.
2.
Turn the main switch on and measure the voltage
with
a
voltmeter
across
the connector terminal and the
chassis.
3.
If
the voltage differs from the battery voltage, the
wiring
harness
is
faulty.
B177F938
(1) Hazard
(2) Engine Oil Pressure
[7] GAUGE
CHECKING
(3)
Charge
(4)
Pre-heat
Lampspec.
Voltage
12V,1.7W
Lead
terminal-
Chassis
Approx. battery voltage
0310P180
2)
Sensor Continuity
1.
Remove
the fuel level
sensor
from the fuel tank.
2.
Measure
the
resistance
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
sensor
terminal and its body.
3
..
lfthe
reference values are
not
indicated, the sensor
is
faulty.
Float
at
upper-
1
to
5ohms
Resistance
Reference
most position
(Sensor term
inal-
value
its body) Float
at
lower-
103
to
107 ohms
most position
9-525
9
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
From
Temperature
Gauge
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11770
Coolant Temperature Sensor
1)
Lead
Terminal Voltage
1.
Disconnect the lead from the coolant temperatu
re
sensor
after
turning
the main switch
off.
2.
Turn
the
main switch on and measure the
voltage
with
a
voltmeter
across
the lead terminal and the
chassis.
3.
If
the voltage differs from
the
battery voltage,
the
wi
ri
ng
harness, fuse
or
coolant temperature gauge
is
faulty.
0321F314
Voltage
Lead
terminal-
Chassis
Approx. battery voltage
(4)
GND
Terminal (Temperature)
(5)
IGN
Terminal (Temperature)
(6)
U Terminal (Temperature)
0321F315
2)
Sensor Continuity
1.
Measure the resistances
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
sensor
terminal and the
chassis.
2.
If
the reference value
is
not
indicated,
the
sensor
is
faulty.
Resistance
Approx. 12.2 ohms
at
130°C
(266°F)
(Sensor terminal
Reference Approx. 23.6 ohms
at
105°C
(221°F)
-Chassis
value Approx. 51.9 ohms
at
BO°C
(176°F)
Approx. 153.9 ohms
at
50°C
(122°F)
(1) Coolant Temperature Sensor
Fuel
Gauge and Coolant Temperature Gauge Continuity
1.
Remove
the panel board from
the
tractor.
2.
Check
the
continuity
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
U
terminal
(1)
and
IGN
terminal
(2)
and
across
the U terminal
(1)
and
GND
terminal
(3).
3.
If
infinity
is
indicated, the fuel gauge
is
faulty.
4.
Check
the
continuity
with
an
ohmmeter
across
the
U
terminal
(6)
and
IGN
terminal
(5)
and
across
the U terminal
(6)
and
GND
terminal
(4).
5.
If
infinity
is
indicated,
the
coolant
temperature
gauge
is
faulty.
(1)
U Terminal (Fuel)
(2)
IGN
Terminal (Fuel)
(3)
GND
Terminal (Fuel)
9-526
81700-82100'82400 WSM,11770
A SAFETY
FIRST
M
MOWER
This symbol, the industry's "Safety
Alert
Symbol",
is
used
throughout this manual and decals
on
the
machine itself
to
warn
of
the possibility
of
personal injury.
Read
these instructions carefully.
It
is
essential
that
you read the instructions and safety regulations before you attempt
to
repair or
use
this unit.
A
DANGER
: Indicates
an
imminently hazardous situation which,
if
not
avoided,
will
result in death
or serious injury.
A WARNING : Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,
if
not
avoided, could result in death
or
serious injury.
A
CAUTION
: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,
if
not
avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury.
• IMPORTANT : Indicates
that
equipment or property damage could result
if
instructions are
not
followed.
•
NOTE
: Gives helpful information.
SAFETY SERVICING
AND
REPAIRING
(1) Before
working
on the machine:
• Park
the
machine on a
firm
and level ground, and set the parking brake.
• Lower
the
implement or
mower
to
the ground.
• Stop the engine, and remove the key.
• Disconnect the battery's ground cable.
• Clean
the
work
area and machine.
(2)
Do
not
work
on the machine while under the influence
of
alcohol, medication, or other substances or
while fatigued.
(3)
Do
not
wear a necktie, scarf, necklace, loose or bulky clothing when you
work
near machine tools or
moving parts.
(4)
Use
tools appropriate
to
the work. Makeshifttools, parts, and procedures
will
not make good repairs.
(5)
When servicing
is
performed together by
two
or more persons, take
care
to
perform all
work
safely.
(6)
Do
not
work
under the machine
that
is
supported solely by a jack. Always support the machine by safety
stands.
M-1
M
MOWER
81700'82100·82400
WSM,11770
(7)
If
the engine must
be
running
to
do
same
work,
make sure the area
is
well ventilated. Never run the
engine in a closed area.
The
exhaust
gas
contains poisonous carbon monoxide.
(8)
Do
not
touch the rotating or
hot
parts while the engine
is
running.
(9)
Fuel
is
extremely flammable and explosive under certain conditions.
Do
not
smoke or
allow
flames or
sparks in your working area.
(10)
To
avoid sparks from
an
accidental short circuit, always disconnect the battery's ground cable first and
connect
it
last.
(11) Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte
is
poisonous.
It
is
strong enough
to
burn skin, clothing and
cause
blindness
if
splashed
into
eyes. Keep electrolyte away from eyes, hands and clothing.
If
you spill
electrolyte on yourself, flush
with
water, and get medical attention immediately.
(12) Battery
gas
can
explode. Keep sparks and open flame away from the
top
of
battery, especially when
charging the battery.
(13) Never remove the radiator
cap
while the engine
is
running, or immediately after stopping. Otherwise,
hot
water
will
spout
out
from radiator.
Wait
for
more than ten minutes
to
cool the radiator, before
removing the
cap.
(14) Escaping
fluid
(fuel
or
hydraulic oil) under pressure
can
penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Relieve
pressure before disconnecting hydraulic
orfuellines.
Tighten all connections before applying pressure.
(15) Do
not
start the engine by shorting across starter terminals.
(16) Unauthorized modifications
to
the machine may impair the function and /
or
safety and affect machine
life.
(17) Do
not
alter or remove any part
of
machine safety system.
(18) Keep a
first
aid
kit
and fire extinguisher handy
at
all times.
(19)
Be
sure
to
chock the wheels
to
prevent accident during servicing the machine.
SAFETY OPERATION
[BEFORE OPERATION]
(l)
Read
the
"OPERATOR'S
MANUAL" carefully.
Be
thoroughly familiar
with
the controls and the proper
use
ofthe
equipment.
(2)
Do
not
wear loose, bulky clothing
when
operating the machine. Do
wear
safety shoes and eye
protection.
(3)
Do
not
operate the machine
while
under the influence
of
alcohol, medication, or other substances or
while
fatigued.
(4)
Never
allow
children
or
inadequately trained persons
to
operate the machine.
Keep
everyone, especially
children and pets,
away
from
the area
of
operation.
(5)
Thoroughly inspect the area where the machine
is
to
be
used.
Remove
all sticks, stones, bottles,
cans,
wires, etc.
(6) Remove all debris (string,
wire
or
cords) which
might
wrap around blade shafts.
(7)
Keep all shields and safety devices in place.
If
a shield, safety device
or
decal
is
missing, defective or
damaged, repair or replace
it
before operating.
(8)
Use
only implements, attachments and accessories approved by
KUBOTA.
(9)
Fuel
is
very flammable. Handle fuel carefully.
•
Use
a properly and approved safety container.
• Refuel the machine outdoors.
• Shut
off
engine and
allow
it
to
cool before refueling.
• Do
not
refuel the machine while smoking or when near open flame or sparks.
• Do
not
overflow
fuel
while
filling
fuel tank.
• Install the fuel tank
cap
securely, and clean up any spilled fuel before starting the engine.
M-2
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,
11770
[OPERATION]
M
MOWER
(1) Operate
the
machine
only
in daylight
or
in good artificial light.
(2) Do
not
run
the
engine in a closed area
without
adequate ventilation.
(3) Before starting
the
engine, make sure
that
all
shift
levers are in neutral positions or in disengaged
positions.
(4) Never
start
the
engine
while
standing on ground. Start the engine only
from
operator's seat.
(5)
Be
alert
when
operating.
To
prevent loss
of
control:
• Watch
for
holes in
the
terrain
or
other hidden hazards.
•
Do
not
drive close
to
ditches, creeks,
or
other hazardous areas.
•
Reduce
speed
when
making sharp turns.
• Avoid sudden stops and starts.
• Before backing up,
look
to
the rear
to
make sure no people
or
obstacles are behind you
or
the machine.
(6) Keep side discharge chute, mulching plate
or
grass catcher (option) in place.
(7)
Do
not
discharge clippings
toward
people
or
objects.
(8)
Do
not
put
hands
or
feet
near
or
under mower deck.
(9) Shut
the
engine
off
and
wait
for
all movement
to
stop before removing grass catcher or unclogging
discharge chute.
(10) Adjust cutting
height
only
when
engine
is
stopped and
mower
blades have stopped turning.
(11)
Mow
across
the
face
of
slopes - never up and down. Exercise extreme caution when changing direction
on slopes. Do
not
mow
excessively steep slopes.
(12)
To
reduce
fire
hazards, keep the engine exhaust area free
of
grass
or
leaves.
(13) Disengage
power
to
the
mower
blades before crossing gravel drives, walks, or roads.
(14)
If
the machine should start
to
vibrate abnormally, stop the engine and check immediately
for
the cause.
Vibration
is
generally a
warning
of
trouble.
(15)
After
striking a foreign object, stop the engine immediately and
thoroughly
inspect the machine
for
any
damage. Repair damage before restarting and operating the machine.
(16) Before leaving
the
operator's
position:
• All
shift
levers are in neutral positions
or
in disengaged positions.
• Shut
off
engine, and remove the key.
(17)
Do
not
operate
the
rear gauge wheel adjusting lever
without
support by block.
[TRANSPORTING]
(1) Disengage
power
to
the
mower
blades, implements and attachments before transporting the machine.
(2)
Do
not
tow
this machine.
(3)
Do
not
use
this machine on public roads.
If
you must transport
it,
use
a pick-up truck, trailer,
or
other
suitable machine and ramp.
(4)
Tie
the machine
down
securely before transporting on public roads.
M-3
M
MOWER
SAFETY DECALS
61700·62100·62400 WSM,11770
•
The
following
safety decals are installed on the mower.
If
a decal becomes damaged. illegible or
is
not
on
the mower. replace it.
The
decal part number
is
listed
in the parts list.
6177FM01
CD
Part No. 66071-61791
DO
NOT
PUT
HANDS
OR
FEET
INTO
MOWER
WHEN
ENGINE
IS
RUNNING
66071-61791
® Part No. 70720-47154
1.
Keep
all
shields
in
place.
2.
StoP
engine
and
wait
untill
blade
stops
before
leaving
operator
position.
3.
Keep
hands.
feet
and
clothing
awaY
from
all
moving
or
rotating
parts.
4.
Make
sure
area
of
operation
is
clear
of
all
persons
and
foreign
objects.
5.Stop
mower
blades
when
crossing
gravel
drives.
walks
or
roads.
70720-47154
M-4
CZ)
Part No. 66071-61781
I.STAY
CLEAR
OF
DISCHARGE
OPENING
AT
ALL
TIMES.
2.
DO
NOT
PUT
HANDS
OR
FEET
INTO
MOWER
WHEN
ENGINE
IS
RUNNING.
3.DO
NOT
OPERATE
MOWER
WITHOUT
DISCHARGE
DEFLECTOR.
66071·61781
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11770
SPECIFICATIONS
M MOWER
Model
RC54·24B
RC60·24B
Suitable
tractor
B1700,B2100,B2400
Mounting
method
Parallel linkage
Adjustment
of
cutting
height
Gauge wheel
Cutting
width
1372 mm (54 in.) 1524 mm (60 in.)
Cutting
height
38to
102
mm
(1.5to4.0
in.)
Weight
(Approx.)
142
kg (314Ibs)
152
kg (335Ibs)
Blade spindle speed
54.75-
1
(3280 rpm) 49.55-
1
(2970 rpm)
Blade
tip
velocity
81.5 m/s (16050 fpm) 81.3
m/s
(15995 fpm)
Blade
length
475 mm (18.7 in.)
523
mm (20.6 in.)
Number
of
blades
3
Total
length
1008 mm (39.7 in.)
1060mm(41.7in.)
Dimensions
Total
width
1758 mm (69.2 in.)
1881
mm(74.1 in.)
Total
height
345 mm (13.6 in.)
345
mm (13.6 in.)
M-5
M MOWER
EXTERIOR
VIEW
AND
APPELLATION
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11770
6
7
8177FM02
(1)
Front Gauge Wheel
(2)
Belt Cover (Left)
(3)
Gear
Box
(4)
Belt Cover (Right)
(5) Discharge Deflector
(6) Deck
(7) Universal Joint
(8) Outer Blade
(9) Front Anti-scalp Roller
(10) Center Blade
(11) Outer Blade
M-6
(12)
Rear
Anti-scalp Roller
(13)
Rear
Gauge Wheel
(14) Anti-scalp Wheel
MECHANIBM
CONTENTS
[1] POWER TRANSMISSION
M-M
1
[2] LIFTING MECHANISM
M-M2
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
[1] POWER TRANSMISSION
~
'"",
,
-----\---
\
\
) 0
B177FM03
M MOWER
(1)
21
T Bevel Gear (RC54-24B)
19T Bevel Gear (RC60-24B)
(2) 16T Bevel Gear
(RC54-24B'RC60-24B)
(3) Pinion Shaft
(4) Universal Joint
(5) Mid
PTO
Shaft
(6) Center Blade
(7) Center Pulley
(8) Bevel Gear Shaft
(9)
Mower
Belt
(10) Blade Shaft
(11)
Outer
Pulley
(12)
Outer
Blade
The
power
is
transmitted
from
mid
PTO
to
blades
as
follows:
• Center Blade
Mid
PTO
Shaft (5)
~
Universal
Joint
(4)
~
Pinion
Shaft (3)
~
21T
Bevel Gear (or
19T
Bevel
Gear)
(1)
~
16T
Bevel Gear (2)
~
Bevel Gear Shaft (8)
~
Center
Blade (6)
• Outer Blade
Mid
PTO
Shaft (5)
~
Universal
Joint
(4)
~
Pinion
Shaft (3)
~
21T
Bevel
Gear (or
19T
Bevel Gear) (1)
~
16T
Bevel
Gear
(2)
~
Bevel
Gear Shaft (8)
~
Center
Pulley (7)
~
Mower
Belt
(9)
~
Outer Pulley (11)
~
Blade Shaft
(1
0)
~
Outer Blade (12)
M-M1
M
MOWER
[2] LIFTING MECHANISM
B1700'B2100·B2400 WSM, 11770
B177FM04
(1)
FrontLink
(2) Rear Link
(3)
Lift
Link
(4)
Lift
Arm
4
(5) Connecting
Rod
5
/
,
/
~
(6) Lower
Li
nk
6
The
lifting
of
mower
is
performed by
the
hydraulic
system installed on
the
tractor.
For avoiding danger,
the
mower
should be
kept
lifting
when
traveling.
When
the
position
control
lever
is
moved
to
"LIFT" position,
the
lower
links
(6)
are risen by
the
oil pressure
of
hydraulic system, and
the connecting rods (5) are pulled rearward.
Therefore,
lift
arms
(4)
round and
the
mower
is
lifted by
the
lift
links
(3)
and rear links.
As
this
link
system
is
a pantographic linkage,
the
mower
can
be kept parallel
at
every position.
A CAUTION
• Never operate
mower
in transport position.
M-M2
SIIRVICING
CONTENTS
GENERAL M-S1
[1] MOWER IDENTIFICATION
M-S1
[2] GENERAL PRECAUTION M-S1
[3] LUBRICANTS M-S2
[4] TIGHTENING TORQUES (GENERAL
USE
SCREWS,
BOLTS
AND
NUTS) M-S2
[5] MAINTENANCE
CHECK
LIST
M-S3
[6]
CHECK
AND
MAINTENANCE M-S3
(1) Check Points
of
Daily
or
Each
Use
M-S3
(2) Check
Point
of
Initial
SO
Hours M-S5
(3) Check Points
of
Every
SO
Hours M-S6
(4) Check
Point
of
Every 1
SO
Hours M-S6
(5) Check
Point
of
Every 2 Years M-S6
[7] SPECIAL TOOLS M-S7
[8] SETIING
UP
MOWER M-S8
TROUBLESHOOTING M-S13
SERVICI
NG
SPECI
FICATI ONS M-S
13
TIGHTENING TORQUES M-S14
CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING
AND
SERVICING
M-S14
CHECKING
AND
ADJUSTING M-S14
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING M-S16
(1)
Dismounting
Mower
M-S16
(2) Disassembling
Mower
M-S17
SERVICING
M-S21
81700·82100·82400
WSM,
11770
M
MOWER
GENERAL
[1]
MOWER
IDENTIFICATION
When contacting your local KUBOTA
distributor,
always
specify mower serial number.
(1)
Mower
Serial Number
[2] GENERAL PRECAUTION
[A]
• During disassembly, carefully arrange removed parts in a
clean area
to
prevent confusion later.
Screws,
bolts and nuts
should
be
installed in
their
original position
to
prevent
reassembly errors.
• When special tools are required,
use
KUBOTA
genuine
special tools.
Special
tools which are
not
frequently used
should
be
made according
to
the drawings provided.
•
Use
KUBOTA
genuine parts or
KUBOTA
- recommended parts
and lubricants or
their
equivalents.
..
Gaskets
and O-rings must
be
replaced during reassembly.
.. Apply grease
to
new O-rings or oil
seals
before assembling.
See
the figure.
.. When reassembling external snap rings
or
internal snap
rings, they must be positioned
so
that
sharp edge faces
against the direction from which aforce
is
applied.
See
the figure.
..
Use
only metric tools when servicing this mower.
Metric
screws,
bolts and nuts are
not
interchangeable
with
nonmetric fasteners.
..
Remove
oil and
dirt
from parts before measuring.
[AI
Oil
Seal
[BI
External Snap Ring
[el
Internal Snap Ring
(1) Grease
(2) Force
(3) Sharp Edge
[C]
[B]
SGOOF001
SGOOF002
M-S1
M MOWER
[3] LUBRICANTS
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770
Place
Capacity
Lubricants
0.361
SAE
90
gear oiI
Gear box
0.38
U.S.qts.
(API
Service G
L-5
gear oi
I)
0.32 Imp.qts.
Greasing
Universal
joint
Until grease overflows
Spindle shafts
Until grease overflows
(Bevel gear shaft and blade shafts)
Belt tension pulley
Until grease overflows
Belt tension
pivot
Until grease overflows
SAE
multi-purpose type grease
lift
arms
Until grease overflows
Front gauge wheels
Until grease overflows
Rear
gauge wheels
Until grease overflows
[4] TIGHTENING TORQUES (GENERAL
USE
SCREWS,
BOLTS
AND
NUTS)
Screws, bolts and nuts whose
tightening
torques are
not
specified in this Workshop Manual should be
tightened
according
to
the
table below.
~Grade
No-grade
or
4T
7T
Unit
\
*(
0
or
0
)
*(
ill
)
Nominal \
Diameter
N·m
kgf·m
ft-Ibs
N·m
kgf·m ft-Ibs
M6
7.85to
9.32
0.80to
0.95
5.79
to
6.87
9.81
to
11.28
1.00to
1.15
7.24t08.32
M8
17.65
to
20.59
1.80
to
2.10
13.0to
15.2
23.54
to
27.46 2.40
to
2.80
17.4to
20.2
M10
39.23
to
45.11
4.00to
4.60 29.0
to
33.2 48.05
to
55.90 4.90
to
5.70
35.5
to
41.2
M12
62.76
to
72.57 6.40
to
7.40 46.3
to
53.5 77.47
to
90.22 7.90
to
9.20
57.2
to
66.5
M14
107.9
to
125.5
11.0t012.8
79.6
to
92.5 123.6
to
147.1
12.6t015.0
91.2to
108
M16
166.7to
191.2
17.0t019.5
123
to
141
196.1
to
225.6
20.0
to
23.0
145
to
166
M18
245.2
to
284.4 25.0
to
29.0
181
to
210
274.6t0318.7 28.0
to
32.5
203
to
235
M20
333.4
to
392.3
34.0
to
40.0
246to
289
367.7
to
431.5
37.5
to
44.0
272
to
318
* The figures on
the
table above are indicated
the
top
of
screw or bolt.
M-S2
B1700'B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770
[5] MAINTENANCE
CH
ECK
LIST
M MOWER
To
keep
the
mower
working
in good condition
as
well
as
to
avoid any accident and trouble, carry
out
periodic inspection and maintenance. Check
the
following
points before
use.
Service Interval
Check Points
Reference
Page
Daily (Each
use)
•
Anything
unusual in previous day's operation -
•
Make sure
mower
blade screws are
tighten
M-S3
•
Check
mower
blades
for
wear
or
damage
M-S14
•
Check gear box oil level
M-S4
•
Check oil leaks
-
•
Check all hardware -
•
Make sure all pins are in place -
•
Clean
mower
deck -
•
Apply
grease
to
universal
joint
M-S4
•
Apply
grease
to
spindle shafts (Bevel gear shaft and blade M-S4
shafts)
•
Apply
grease
to
belt
tension pulley
M-S5
•
Apply
grease
to
belt
tension
pivot
M-S5
•
Apply
grease
to
I
ift
arms
M-S5
Initial
50
hours
• Change gear box oil
M-S5
Every
50
~ours
•
Apply
grease
to
front
gauge wheels M-S6
•
Apply
grease
to
rear gauge wheels M-S6
•
Check
mower
belt
M-S14
Every 150 hours
• Change gear box oil
M-S5
Every 2 years
• Replace gear box oil
seal
M-S6
(After
purchase)
[6]
CH
ECK
AND
MAINTENANCE
(1) Check Points
of
Daily
or
Each
Use
B177FM06
(1)
Mower
Blade Screw
Retightening
Mower
Blade Screw
A CAUTION
•
To
avoid
injury,
always handle
the
mower
blade
with
care.
1.
Dismount
the
mower
and
turn
it
over
to
expose
the
mower
blades.
2.
Wedge a block
of
wood
securely between
the
mower
blade
and
mower
deck.
3.
Retighten
the
mower blade screw
to
the
specified torque.
4.
If
the
mower
blade screw
is
worn
or
broken, replace it.
98.1
to
117.7 N'm
Tightening
torque
Mower
blade screw
10.0to
12.0
kgf'm
72.3
to
86.8 ft-Ibs
Checking
Mower
Blade
1.
See
page
M-S
14.
M-S3
M MOWER
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
Greasing Spindle Shafts
1.
Grease
the
grease nipples (1),
(2)
of
the
spindle shafts
if
the
amount
of
grease
is
insufficient.
(1) Check Plug
(2)
Oil Filler Plug
Greasing Universal Joint
1.
Grease
the
internal splines (1) and grease nipples (2)
of
the
universal
joint
if
the
amount
of
grease
is
insufficient.
(2) Grease Nipple
(2) Grease Nipple (Blade Shaft)
(1) Spline
(1) Grease Nipple (Bevel Gear Shaft)
Checking Gear Box Oil
level
1.
Place
the
mower
on level ground.
2.
Loosen
the
check plug (1), and check
to
see
if
oil
seep
from
the
opening.
3.
If
the oil level
is
low, remove the oil
filler
plug
(2)
and add
new gear oil.
III IMPORTANT
•
Use
the
specified gear oil.
Refer
to
"LUBRICANTS".
(See
page M·S2.)
B177FM07
B177FM08
B177FM09
M-S4
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770
B177FM10
(2) Check Point
of
Initial
50
Hours
M MOWER
Greasing Belt Tension Pulley
1.
Grease
the
grease nipple (1)
of
the
belt tension pulley
if
the
amount
of
grease
is
insufficient.
(1)
Grease
Nipple
Greasing Belt Tension Pivot
1.
Grease
the
grease nipple (1)
of
the
belt tension
pivot
if
the
amount
of
grease
is
insufficient.
(1)
Grease
Nipple
Greasing Lift Arms
1.
Grease
the
grease nipples (1)
of
the
lift
arms
if
the
amount
of
grease
is
insufficient.
(1)
Grease
Nipple
Changing Gear Box Oil
1.
Dismount
the
mower
from the tractor, and place
the
mower
on level ground.
2. Remove
the
oil
filler
plug (2).
3. Remove the drain plug (1), and drain
the
used
oil completely.
4.
After
draining
the
used
oil, reinstall the drain plug.
5.
Fill
with
new
oil up
to
the specified level.
II
IMPORTANT
..
Use
the specified gear oil.
Refer
to
"LUBRICANTS".
(See
page M·S2.)
(1)
Drain
Plug
M-SS
(2)
Oil Filler
Plug
M MOWER
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
(3) Check Points
of
Every
50
Hours
Greasing Front Gauge Wheels
1.
Grease
the
grease nipples (1), (2)
of
the
front
gauge wheels
if
the
amount
of
grease
is
insufficient.
Greasing
Rear
Gauge Wheels
1.
Grease
the
grease nipples (1)
of
the
rear gauge wheels
if
the
amount
of
grease
is
insufficient.
(1) Grease Nipple
(2) Grease Nipple
(Front Gauge Wheel)
(1) Grease Nipple
(Front Gauge Wheel Bracket)
B177FM12
B177FM10
Checking
Mower
Belt
1.
See
page
M-S
14.
(4) Check
Point
of
Every 150 Hours
Changing Gear Box Oil
1.
See
page
M-SS.
(5) Check
Point
of
Every 2 Years
Replacing Gear Box Oil
Seal
1. Replace
the
gear box oil seals (1), (2)
with
new
ones.
(See
page
M-S
19.)
B177FM13
2
(1) Oil
Seal
(2) Oil
Seal
M-S6
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770 M
MOWER
[7] SPECIAL TOOLS
press
fit
the
A
43
mm
1.69 in.
B
42
mm
1.65 in.
C
28
mm Dia.
1.10 in. Dia.
D
22.90
to
22.95
mm
Dia.
0.9016
to
0.9035 in. Dia.
E
19.90to
19.95 mm Dia.
0.7835
to
0.7854 in. Dia.
F
42mm
1.65 in.
G
28 mm Dia.
1.10 in. Dia.
H
19.90to
19.95 mm Dia.
0.7835
to
0.7854 in. Dia.
C1
2.0mm
0.079 in.
C2
1.0mm
0.039 in.
C1,
C2
: Chamfer
180 (7.09)
180 (7.09)
C
t-----'~C2
B177FM56
III NOTE
•
The
following
special tools are
not
provided,
so
make them referring
to
the figures.
Unit:
mm (in.) Tension Arm Bushing Replacing Tool
Application:
Use
to
press
out
and
to
tension arm bushing.
Unit:
mm (in.)
200 (7.87)
J-"
cl
~C2
B177FM57
200 (7.87)
C1,
C2
: Chamfer
Front Gauge Wheel Bushing Replacing Tool
Application:
Use
to
press
out
and
to
press
fit
the
front
gauge wheel bushing.
A
46mm
1.81
in.
B
45mm
1.77 in.
C
40 mm Dia.
1.57 in. Dia.
D
33.90
to
33.95 mm Dia.
1.3346
to
1.3366 in. Dia.
E
29.90
to
29.95 mm Dia.
1.1772to1.1791
in.Dia.
F
45mm
1.77 in.
G
40
mm Dia.
1.57 in. Dia.
H
29.90
to
29.95 mm Dia.
1.1772
to
1.1791 in. Dia.
C1
2.0mm
0.079 in.
C2
1.0mm
0.039 in.
Rear
Link Bushing Replacing Tool
Application:
Use
to
press
out
and
to
press
fit
the
rear link bushing.
A
92
mm
3.62 in.
B
90mm
3.54 in.
C
28
mm Dia.
1.10 in. Dia.
D
22.90
to
22.95 mm Dia.
0.9016
to
0.9035 in. Dia.
E
19.90to
19.95 mm Dia.
0.7835
to
0.7854 in. Dia.
F
90mm
3.54 in.
G
28
mm Dia.
1.10in.Dia.
H
19.90to
19.95
mm
Dia.
0.7835
to
0.7854 in. Dia.
C1
2.0mm
0.079 in.
C2
1.0mm
0.039 in.
Unit:
mm (in.)
C1,
C2
: Chamfer
250 (9.84)
j..-----.---"
G
1_~C2
C1
B177FM58
M-S7
M
MOWER
B
1700·B21
00·B2400 WSM, 11770
Assembling
Mower
A CAUTION
•
Do
not
operate the rear gauge wheel adjusting lever (3)
without
support by block (2).
1.
Take
out
all mower components from the
case,
and assemble
the mower.
2. Support the mower deck
with
a block (2)
as
shown in the
figure.
3.
Turn the anti-scalp wheel (1) sideway position, and set the
rear gauge wheel
(4) on the lowest cutting height.
4.
Remove
the a block.
5.
Park
the tractor on level ground,
and
set
the rear wheels (5)
of
the tractor
at
the outer position (6)
as
shown in the figure.
(1) Anti-scalp Wheel
(2)
Block
(3)
Rear Gauge Wheel Adjusting Lever
(4)
Rear
Gauge Wheel
(5)
Rear
Wheel
(6)
Outer Position
B177FM15
(1) Front Hanger Bracket
Front Hanger Bracket
1.
Attach the
front
hanger bracket (1)
to
the frame
with
M14
bolts.
(A) Outside
(B)
Inside
(C)
Thread Size: M12 x Pitch 1.25
(0)
Thread Size: M12 x Pitch 1.75
Mid Hanger Bracket
1.
Screw M
12
stud bolts (1) in the clutch housing.
2. Attach the mid hanger bracket (2)
to
the clutch housing
with
spring washers
and
nuts.
(1) Stud Bolt
(2)
Mid Hanger Bracket
31.4 N'm
Stud bolt
3.2
k~f.m
23.1
-Ibs
Tightening torque
68.6 N'm
Nut
7.0k~tm
50.6
-Ibs
2
pep
®mnillmJnffrn@
B177FM16
B177FM17
M-S8
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11770 M
MOWER
(1)
Rear
Hanger Bracket
Rear
Hanger Bracket
1.
Insert the rear hanger bracket
(1)
from
left
side
of
the
frame
holes, and
set
it
with
M8 bolt.
Lift
Arm,
Lift
Link and Connecting
Rod
1.
Install
the
lift
arms (2),
lift
links
(3)
and connecting rods
(1)
to
the rear hanger bracket
with
plain washers and cotter pins.
(3)
Lift
Li
nk
(1)
Connecting
Rod
(2)
LiftArm
3
B177FM19
8177FM20
Rear
Link
(When mounting the mower only)
1.
Install the rear links
(3)
to
the mid hanger brackets (1)
with
plain washers and cotter pins.
2.
Attach
the
lift
links
(2)
to
the rear links
(3)
with
clevis pins,
plain washers and cotter pins.
(When mounting the
mower
with
front
loader)
1.
Install the rear links
(3)
to
the
front
loader frame
(5)
with
pins
(4),
plain washers and cotter pins.
2.
Attach the
lift
links
(2)
to
the rear links
(3)
with
clevis pins,
plain washers and cotter pins.
B177FM21
(1)
Mid Hanger Bracket
(2) Lift Link
(3)
Rear
Link
(4)
Pin
(20 mm dia. x
135
mm length,
0.79 in. dia. x
5.31
in. length)
(5)
Front Loader Frame
M-S9
M MOWER B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
Lift Bracket
1.
Remove
the spacer and lower links from the shaft
of
lower
link.
2.
Attach both
lift
brackets (3) inside the lower links (4)
with
the
lower
link
pins (1)
as
shown in the figure.
3.
Connect the connecting rods (2)
to
the
lift
brackets (3)
with
clevis pins, plain washers and cotter pins.
11IIII
IMPORTANT
.. Connect the
lift
rods (5)
of
the tractor
as
shown in the figure,
and adjust the length
of
both
lift
rods
equally
with
the
turnbuckle
of
the
right
lift
rod.
(Reference)
.. Make sure the length
(L)
of
the connecting rod (2)
is
625
mm
(24.6 in.).
Setting Position Control Lever
1.
Set
the stop screw (3) at the
top
of
the range
to
pu
II
the
position control lever (2) back fully.
2.
Set
the stop knob screw (1)
at
the
"3"
range
as
shown in the
figure.
B177FM24
B177FM25
4
(1)
Lower Link
Pin
(2)
Connecting
Rod
(3)
Lift
Bracket
(1) Stop Knob
Screw
(2)
Position Control Lever
M-S10
(4)
Lower Link
(5)
Lift
Rod
(3)
Stop Screw
81700'82100·82400 WSM, 11770 M
MOWER
Setting
Mower
1.
Turn the steering wheel
fully
left.
2. Install the mower from
right
side
ofthe
tractor.
3. Roll
the
mower
under
the
tractor,
and
then
return
the
steering wheel.
8177FM27
1
3
8177FM29
Front Link
1.
Hook the
front
link
(3)
with
the clevis pin section
to
front
end
of
the groove (2), and then
turn
the stopper (4)
as
shown in
the figure.
(Reference)
• Make
sure
the length
(L)
ofthe
front
link
(3)
is
as
follows.
RC54-24B: 505
mm
(19.9 in.)
RC60-24B: 500
mm
(19.7 in.)
(1) Stay (3) Front Link
(2) Groove (4) Stopper
Mounting Front Link
1.
Push
down
the link fixing lever, pulling the L-pin.
2. Hook the
front
link
(2)
to
the lever fulcrum, and
turn
the
link
fixing lever(1).
3. Return the L-pin (3).
II
NOTE
.. Make sure the
link
fixing
lever (1)
is
fixed
with
L-pin (3)
securely.
Mounting Universal Joint and
Rear
Link
1.
Pull
back the coupler
(1)
of
the universal joint.
2.
Push
the universal
joint
(3)
onto
the
mid PTa shaft, and
release the coupler
(1).
3. Slide the universal
joint
back and forward
to
make sure the
universal
joint
is
locked securely.
4.
Lower the rear links.
5. Attach the rear links (4)
to
the mower deck, pulling the L-pins
(2).
B177FM31
(1) Coupler
(2) L-pin
(1) Link Fixing Lever
(2) Front Link
M-S11
(3) Universal Joint
(4) Rear Link
(3) L-pin
M
MOWER
B1700·B2100'B2400 WSM, 11770
B177FM32
B177FM29
(5) Rear Stopper
(6) Connecting
Rod
(7) Turnbuckle
Adjusting Front Link and Connecting
Rod
A
CAUTION
• Before starting the engine, change the mid
PTO
and gear
shift
lever into neutral.
• Shut
off
the engine and
allow
the
mower
blades
to
stop
before making adjustments.
1.
Park
the tractor on level ground
with
the mower touching
the ground.
2.
Set
the height
ofthe
four
mower gauge wheels the
same.
3.
If
the
front
gauge wheels are
not
on the ground, remove the
front
link from the mower. And adjust the length
(L)
of
the
front
link
(1)
until the
front
gauge wheels come into contact
with
the ground.
4.
Attach the
front
link
to
the
mower.
5.
Start the engine.
6.
Lift the mower
to
the maximum
lifting
position and shut
off
the engine.
7.
Adjust the turnbuckles
(7)
of
the
left
and
right
connecting
rods
(6)
so
that
the
clearances are
within
the
factory
spedficati
ons.
(1) Front Link
(2)
Mid
Hanger Bracket
(3) Front Stopper
(4) Tractor Frame
Clearance (A) between
2to
5 mm
front
stopper and mid
Factory
spec.
0.08
to
0.20 in.
hanger bracket
Clearance (8) between
5to
10
mm
rear
st0frper and
Factory
spec.
0.20
to
0.39 in.
tractor
rame
II
IMPORTANT
• Proper adjustment
for
the
connecting rod
length
is
very
important
to
avoid damage
to
the mower
lifting
system.
B177FM33
B177FM25
M-S12
B1700·B21 00·B2400
WSM,11770
TROUBLESHOOTING
M MOWER
Symptom
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Blade Does
Not
Turn
..
Mid
PTa system
malfunctioning
Check transmission
-
..
Broken
mower
belt
Replace
mower
belt
M-S14
Blade Speed Is
Slow
.. Loosen
mower
belt
Replace
mower
belt
M-S14
or
tension spri ng
S18
..
Clogged grass Remove grass
-
..
Flattened
out
or
worn
cup washer
Replace cup washer M-S17
Cutting
Is Poor ..
Worn
or
broken
mower
blade
Sharpen
or
replace M-S14
mower
blade
.. Loosen
mower
blade screw
Retighten
mower
M-S3
blade screw
..
Cutting
height
improper
Adjust cutting
M-S15
height
Mower
Is
Not
Lifted
.. Broken linkage system
Replace linkage
-
system
.. Trouble
of
hydraulic system
Check hydraulic
-
system
SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Factory Specification
Limite de service
Pinion Shaft Turning Force
Less
than
117.7 N
-
12.0
kgf
26.51bs
Turning Torque
Less
than
1.47 N'm
-
0.15
kgf'm
1.08 ft-Ibs
Bevel Gears in Gear Box Backlash
0.10to
0.20 mm
0.4mm
0.0039
to
0.0079 in.
0.0157in.
Tension collar
to
Tension
Arm
Bushing Clearance
0.025
to
0.127 mm
0.30
mm
0.00098
to
0.00500 in.
0.0118in.
Tension Coller
0.0.
19.954to
19.975 mm
-
0.78559
to
0.78642 in.
Tension
Arm
Bushing 1.0.
20.000
to
20.081 mm
-
0.78740
to
0.79059 in.
Front Gauge Wheel Bushing
I.D.
30.000
to
30.085 mm
31.000mm
1.18110
to
1.18445 in.
1.22047 in.
Rear Link Bushing
I.D.
20.000
to
20.081 mm
21.000mm
0.78740
to
0.79059 in.
0.82677 in.
M-S13
M
MOWER
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torques
of
screws and nuts on the table below are especially specified.
(For general
use
screws and
nuts:
See
page
M-S2)
Item
N'm
kgf'm
ft-Ibs
Gear box bracket
mounting
screw
78.5
to
88.2
8.0t09.0
57.9
to
65.1
Mower blade screw
98.1
to
117.7 10.0to
12.0
n.3to
86.8
Gear box mounting screw 78.5t088.2
8.0to
9.0
57.9
to
65.1
Outer pulley
mounting
nut
166.7
to
186.3
17.0t019.0
123.0
to
137.4
Pulley holder
mounting
screw 77.5t090.2
7.9
to
9.2
57.1
to
66.5
CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING
AND
SERVICING
CHECKING
AND
ADJUSTING
Gear box bracket
78.5to88.2 N'm
Tightening torque
mounting screw
8.0
to
9.0
kgf·m
57.9
to
65.1
ft-Ibs
Checking
Mower
Blade
1.
Check
the cutting edge
of
mower blade.
2.
Sharpen the cutting
edges,
if
the mower blades are
as
shown
in
figure®.
3.
Replace
the
mower blades,
if
they are
as
shown in figure @ .
•
IMPORTANT
.. Never
forget
to
set the
two
cup washers between
mower
blade and spline boss,
when
reassembling
the
mower
blades.
III
NOTE
..
To
sharpen the mower blades by yourself, clamp the
mower
blade securely in a vise and
use
a large mill
file
along
the
original bevel.
..
To
balance the
mower
blade, place a small rod through
the
center hole and check
to
see
if
the blade balances evenly.
File heavy side
of
the
blade until
it
balances
out
even.
Checking
Mower
Belt
1.
Check
to
see
the
mower belt.
2.
Replace
the mower belt
with
a new one,
if
there
is
found
surface split
at
more than 3 positions.
(When replacing mower belt)
1.
Dismount
the
mower from the tractor.
2.
Remove
the
left
and right hand belt cover from
the
mower
deck.
3.
Clean
around
the
gear box.
4.
Remove
the right hand bracket
(3)
which mounts the gear
box
to
the mower deck.
5.
Remove
the mower belt
(2)
from the tension pulley
(1).
Slip
the mower belt over the
top
of
the gear box.
6.
To
install a new belt,
reverse
the
above procedure.
III
IMPORTANT
..
After
setting the gear box bracket mounting screws on the
deck
without
tightening, then mount the other screws on
the gear box. And
finally
tighten them.
3
(3) Cracked Blade
0012F007
B143F105
(1) New Blade
(2) Worn Blade
(1)
Tension Pulley
(2)
Mower
Belt
(3) Gear
Box
Bracket (Right)
M-S14
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM, 11770
S
ill
c H
c I
B177FM36
M MOWER
Adjusting Cutting Height
1.
The
cutting height
can
be
adjusted from
38
mm
to
102
mm
(from
1.5
in.
to
4.0 in.).
2.
To
adjust the cutting height,
lift
the mower slightly and close
the 3-point lowering
speed
knob (1).
3.
Adjust the cutting height
with
the
front
gauge wheels, rear
gauge
wheel,
anti-scalp wheel and anti-scalp
rollers
as
shown in the table below.
The
recommended cutting height
is
approx.
50
mm
(2.0 in.).
Cutting height
Front gauge
Rear
gauge
Anti-scalp
Anti-scalp
wheel
wheel
wheel
roller
38 mm (1.5 in.)
c-x
1
a
-x
I
51
mm (2.0 in.)
C-Y
2
64
mm (2.5 in.)
B-X
3
b
-x
II
76 mm (3.0 in.)
B-Y
4
89
mm
(3.5 in.)
A-X
5
c
-x
III
102
mm
(4.0 in.)
A-Y
6
_IMPORTANT
..
After
adjusting
the
cutting
height,
open
the
3-point
lowering speed knob (1) and adjust the
lowering
speed
of
the mower.
(1)
3-point Lowering
Speed
Knob
Adjusting Front Link and Connecting
Rod
1.
See
page
M-S
12.
M-S15
M MOWER
B1700'B2100·B2400 WSM, 11770
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING
(1)
Dismounting
Mower
A CAUTION
.. When dismounting
or
mounting the mower. park the tractor on
flat
ground. apply the parking brake. and
stop the engine.
Anti-scalp Wheel
1.
Start
the
engine, and
lift
the mower.
2. Turn
the
anti-scalp wheel (1) sideway position and set
the
rear gauge wheel (2) on the lowest cutting height.
3. Lower the mower, and stop the engine.
(When reassembling)
..
After
mounting
the
mower,
turn
the
anti-scalp
wheel
straight position.
B177FM37
2
(1) Anti-scalp Wheel (2) Rear Gauge
Wheel
(When reassembling)
..
Apply
grease
to
the
splines and grease
nipples
of
the
universal
joint
.
• Slide the universal
joint
back and forward
to
make sure the
universal
joint
is
locked securely.
Rear
Link and Universal Joint
1.
Disconnect the rear links (4), pulling the L-pin (2).
2.
Pull
back the coupler (1)
to
unlock, and remove
the
universal
joint
(3) from the mid PTa shaft.
3. Start
the
engine, and
shift
the
position
control
lever
to
"LIFT" position.
Front Link
1.
Push
down
the
link
fixing lever (2)
to
disconnect the
front
link
(3), pulling the L-pin (1).
2.
Remove the
front
link (3) from the stay (4).
(When reassembling)
.. Hook the
front
link
(3)
with
the
clevis pin section
to
front
end
of
the groove (5), and then turn the stopper (6)
as
shown in
the
figure.
.. Make sure the
link
fixing lever (2)
is
fixed
with
L-pin (1)
securely.
(4) Stay
(5) Groove
(6) Stopper
(1) L-pin
(2) Link Fixing Lever
(3) Front Link
B177FM38
(1) Coupler
(2) L-pin
(3) Universal
Joint
(4) Rear Link
M-S16
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770
M
MOWER
Taking Out
Mower
1.
Turn the steering wheel fully left.
2.
Take
out
the mower
to
the right side
of
the tractor.
B177FM27
I
Universal Joint and Belt Cover
1.
Remove
the universal
joint
(1).
2.
Remove
the
left
and right belt
covers
(2), (3).
98.1
to
117.7 N'm
Tightening
torque
Mower
blade screw
10.0
to
12.0
kgf'm
72.3
to
86.8 ft-Ibs
Mower
Blades (Center Blade and Outer Blades)
1.
Turn over the mower.
2.
Unscrew the mower blade screw
(5),
and remove the spline
boss
(4),
two
cup washers
(3),
mower blade
(2)
and dust cover
(1).
_
NOTE
•
To
remove
the
blade securely,
wedge
a block
of
wood
between one blade and the mower deck in
such
position
that
it
will
hold the blade safely
while
loosing or tightening
the blade screw.
(When reassembling)
•
Be
sure
to
assemble
the
two
cup washers
between
the
mower blade and spline
boss.
_IMPORTANT
• Make sure the cup washer
is
not
flattened
out
or
worn,
causing blade
to
slip easily.
Replace
two
cup washers
if
either
is
damaged.
(2) Disassembling
Mower
B177FM40
B177FM42
(1) Universal Joint
(2) Belt Cover (Left)
(1)
Dust Cover
(2)
Mower
Blade
(3)
Cup Washer
(4)
Spline
Boss
(5)
Mower
Blade Screw
M-S17
(3)
Belt Cover (Right)
(A) Loosen
M MOWER
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770
Gear box mounting
78.5
to
88.2 N'm
Tightening
torque
8.0
to
9.0
kgf'm
screw
57.9
to
65.1
ft-Ibs
Blade
Boss
1.
Remove the external snap ring (2).
2.
Remove the blade
boss
(1).
Gear Box and
Mower
Belt
1.
Turn over
the
mower.
2.
Remove
the
tension spri ng (4).
3.
Unscrew
the
left
and
right
gear box
mounting
screws (3),
(S)
and remove
the
gear box
(2)
from
the
mower
deck.
4.
Remove the
mower
belt
(1).
(When reassembling)
• Install
the
reamer screws
(3)
at
their
original
positions
as
shown in the figure.
(4)
Tension Spring
(5)
Gear
Box
Mounting
Screw
(2) External Snap
Ring
(1)
Blade
Boss
(1)
Mower
Belt
(2) Gear
Box
(3) Gear
Box
Mounting Screw
(Reamer Screw)
B177FM44
B177FM43
B177FM45
M-S18
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11770
M
MOWER
Disassembling Gear Box
1.
Unscrew the drain plug (18), and drain gear box oil.
2.
Remove
the center pulley (20)
with
a puller, and remove the
feather key
(22)
on
the
bevel gear shaft.
3.
Remove
the gear box
caps
(6), (7).
4.
Remove
the oil
seal
(12), internal snap ring
(13)
and shim
(14).
5.
Tap
out
the pinion shaft (16)
with
the ball bearing (15), and
remove the
21T
bevel gear (or
19T
bevel gear)
(1).
6.
Remove
the internal snap ring (5), shim
(4)
and ball bearing
(3).
7.
Remove
the external snap ring (8), and
draw
out
the
bevel
gear shaft
(21).
8.
Remove
the
16T
bevel gear (9), ball bearing (10), shim
(11)
and oil
seal
(19).
Shim
Oil
Seal
Internal
Snap Ring
Shim
Ball Bearing
Pinion Shaft
Oil Filler Plug
Drain Plug
Oil
Seal
Center Pulley
Bevel Gear
Shaft
Feather Key
(11
)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(When reassembling)
•
Replace
the oil
seals
(12),
(19)
and gear box
caps
(6),
(7)
with
new
ones.
• Check the backlash and
turning
torque.
If
not
proper, adjust
with
the shims (4), (11), (14).
(See
page
M-S21,
22.)
(1)
21
T Bevel Gear (RC54-24B)
19T Bevel Gear (RC60-24B)
(2) Gear Box
(3) Ball Bearing
(4) Shim
(5)
Internal
Snap Ring
(6) Gear Box
Cap
(7) Gear Box Cap
(8) External Snap Ring
(9) 16T Bevel Gear
(RC54-24B'RC60-24B)
(10) Ball Bearing
M-S19
M MOWER
B177FM46
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770
Outer Pulley and Blade Shaft
1.
Unscrew the outer pulley mounting
nut
(22), and remove the
outer pulley
(25)
and feather key (20).
II
NOTE
•
The
outer pulley mounting
nut
has
left-hand threads. Turn
it
clockwise
to
loosen.
2.
Unscrew
the
pulley
holder
mounting
screws (18), and
separate the
left
pulley holder
(30)
and plate
(26)
from the
mower deck.
3.
Remove
the external snap ring
(36)
on the
left
blade shaft
(31).
4.
Remove
the spline
boss
(35)
and oil
seal
(34).
5.
Remove
the internal snap ring
(33)
and
tap
out
the
left
blade
shaft
(31)
with
the ball bearings (29), (32), taking care
not
to
damage the
grease
nipple (21).
6.
Remove
the
oi
I
seal
(27)
and internal snap
ri
ng (28).
7.
Remove
the ball bearings (29),
(32)
from the blade shaft (31).
8.
Remove
the right pulley holder
(10)
and blade shaft
(12)
as
above.
(When reassembling)
• Replace the oil
seals
(34), (27),
(15)
and
(7)
with
new
ones.
Outer pulley mounting
166.7to
186.3 N'm
17.0to
19.0 kgf'm
nut
123.0
to
137.4 ft-Ibs
Tightening torque
Pulley holder mounting
77.5
to
90.2 N'm
7.9to9.2
kgf'm
screw
57.1
to
66.5
ft-Ibs
(1)
Outer pulley Mounting Nut
(2)
Spring Washer
(3) Plain Washer
(4) Outer Pulley (Right)
(5)
Pulley Holder Mounting Screw
(6)
Plate
(7) Oil
Seal
(8) Internal
Snap
Ring
(9)
Ball Bearing
(10) Pulley Holder (Right)
(11) Feather
Key
(12) Blade Shaft (Right)
(13) Ball Bearing
(14) Internal
Snap
Ring
(15) Oil
Seal
(16) Spline
Boss
(17) External
Snap
Ring
(18) Pulley Holder Mounting Screw
M-S20
(19)
Grease
Nipple
(20) Feather
Key
(21) Grease Nipple
(22) Outer Pulley Mounting Nut
(23) Spring Washer
(24) Plain Washer
(25) Outer Pulley (Left)
(26) Plate
(27) Oil
Seal
(28) Internal
Snap
Ring
(29)
Ball
Bearing
(30) Pulley Holder (Left)
(31) Blade Shaft (Left)
(32)
Ball
Bearing
(33) Internal
Snap
Ring
(34) Oil
Seal
(35) Spline
Boss
(36) External
Snap
Ring
81700·82100·82400 WSM, 11770
M
MOWER
SERVICING
Oil Filler Plug
1.
Remove
the oil
filler
plug (1) from the gear box.
2.
Check
the hole
of
breather does
not
clogging.
3.
If
the breather hole (2)
has
clogged, clean it.
Less
than 117.7 N
Turning force Factory
spec.
12.0
kgf
26.5lbs
Lessthan 1.47 N'm
Turning
torque
Factory
spec.
0.15
kgf'm
1.08 ft-Ibs
(2)
8reather Hole
(1)
Oil Filler Plug
Turning Torque
of
Pinion Shaft
1.
Remove
the mower belt, and reassemble the gear box
to
the
mower deck.
2.
Wind
a string around
the
pinion
shaft and set a spring
balance (or push-pull gauge)
to
the
tip
of
the
string, and
then slowly pull the spring balance horizontally
to
measure
the
turning
force.
3.
If the measurement exceeds the factory specification, check
the bearing and gears and adjust the adjusting shims
(1), (2),
(3).
8177FM48
8177FM47
(Reference)
• Thickness
of
adjusting
shims
(1),
(2),
(3)
:
0.2
mm
(0.0079 in.)
0.3
mm
(0.0118 in.)
2
(1)
Adjusting
Shim
(2)
Adjusting
Shim
(3)
Adjusting
Shim
8177FM49
M-S21
M MOWER
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11770
(Reference)
.. Thickness
of
adjusting shims (1), (4),
(6)
:
0.2
mm (0.0079 in.)
0.3
mm (0.0118 in.)
Factory spec.
0.10toO.20
mm
Backlash
between
0.0039
to
0.0079 in.
bevel gears
Allowable
limit
OAmm
0.0157 in.
Backlash between Bevel Gears
1.
Remove
the
gear box cap (3).
2.
Place
fuses
the
21T
bevel gear (or
19T
bevel gear)
(2)
on
the
pinion shaft (5).
3.
Turn
the
pinion shaft.
4.
Take
out
the
fuses,
and measure the thickness
of
fuses
with
an
outside micrometer. (Backlash equal thickness
of
fuse)
5.
If
the
backlash exceeds
the
allowable
limit,
adjust
with
shims
(1), (4), (6).
(4) Shim
(5) Pinion Shaft
(6) Shim
(1) Shim
(2) 21T Bevel Gear (RC54-24B)
19T Bevel Gear (RC60-24B)
(3)
GearBoxCap
B177FM49
o
0347F037
Clearance between Tension Collar and Tension Arm Bushing
1.
Measure
the
tension collar O.D.
with
an
outside micrometer.
2.
Measure
the
tension
arm
bushing
I.D.
with
an
inside
micrometer, and calculate
the
clearance.
3.
Ifthe
clearance exceeds
the
allowable
limit,
replace them.
Factory spec.
0.025toO.127 mm
Clearance
between
0.00098
to
0.00500 in.
tension collar and
tension arm bushing
Allowable
limit
0.30 mm
0.0118 in.
Tension collar
a.D.
Factory spec.
19.954to
19.975
mm
0.78559
to
0.78642 in.
Tension arm bushing
Factory spec.
20.000to20.081 mm
!.D.
0.78740
to
0.79059 in.
B083F235
M-$22
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11770 M MOWER
(A) (B)
..
..
Replacing Tension Arm Bushing
(When removing)
1.
Remove
the
grease nipple from
the
tension arm.
2.
Using a tension arm bushing replacing
tool
(see
page M-S7),
press
out
the
used
bushings.
(When installing)
1.
Clean
new
bushings and apply gear oil
to
them.
2. Using a tension arm bushing replacing
tool,
press in
new
bushings (1) until
they
are flush
with
tension arm (2)
as
shown in
the
figure.
B177FM50
(1) Tension Arm Bushing
(2) Tension Arm
(A) When Removing
(8) When Installing
B177FM51
B177PM01
(A)
,.
(B)
,.
Front Gauge Wheel Bushing Wear
1.
Measure
the
front
gauge wheel bushing I.D.
with
an inside
micrometer.
2.
If
the
measurement exceeds the allowable
limit,
replace
the
bushings.
Factory
spec.
30.000
to
30.085 mm
Front gauge wheel
1.18110
to
1.18445 in.
bushing I.D.
Allowable
limit
31.000 mm
1.22047 in.
Replacing Front Gauge Wheel Bushing
(When removing)
1.
Using a
front
gauge wheel bushing replacing
tool
(see
page
M-S7),
press
out
the
used
bushings.
(When installing)
1.
Clean new bushing and apply gear oil
to
them.
2.
Using a
front
gauge wheel bushing replacing
tool,
press
in
new
bushings {2} until they are flush
with
front
gauge wheel
stay (1)
as
shown in
the
figure.
B177FM52
(1) Front Gauge Wheel Stay
(2) Front Gauge Wheel Bushing
(A) When Removing
(8) When Installing
B177FM53
2
M-S23
M
MOWER
B177PM02
B1700'B2100'B2400 WSM,11770
Rear
Link Bushing Wear
1.
Measure the rear link bushing
I.D.
with
an
inside micrometer.
2.
If
the
measurement
exceeds
the allowable limit, replace
the
bushings.
Factory
spec.
20.000
to
20.081 mm
0.78740
to
0.79059 in.
Rear link bushing
J.D.
Allowable
limit
21.000 mm
0.82677 in.
Replacing
Rear
Link Bushing
(When removing)
1.
Using a rear link bushing replacing
tool
(see
page M-S7),
press
out
the
used
bushings.
(When installing)
1.
Clean new bushings and apply gear oil
to
them.
2.
Using a rear
link
bushing replacing
tool,
press in
new
bushings (1) until they are flush
with
rear link (2)
as
shown in
the figure.
(A)
...
(B)
...
(1) Rear Link Bushing
(2) Rear Link
(A) When Removing
(B)
When Installing
B177FM55
M-S24
TO
THE
READER
In
this
section,
the
main
additional
functions
of
BI-SPEED
TURN
for
B1700HSDB,
B2100HSDB
and
B2400HSDB
tractor and 2 wheel drive
for
B1700E
and
B2400HSE
are explained separately
in
two
items,
"Mechanism"
and
"Servicing".
As
for
the items which are
not
explained in this section, refer
to
Workshop
Manual
for
B1700'B21 00·B2400.
• Mechanism
Information
on
the
construction
and
function
are
included
for
B1700E·B2400HSE
for
2WD
tractor
and B1700HSDB·B21
OOHSDB
and
B2400HSDB
for
Bi-SPEED
TURN
tractor.
This
part should
be
understood before
proceeding
with
troubleshooting, disassembling and servicing.
• Servicing
For B1700E'B2400HSE
for
2WD
tractor
and B1700HSDB'B21
OOHSDB
and
B2400HSDB
for
Bi-SPEED
TURN
tractor, there are troubleshooting, servicing
specification lists, checking and adjusting, disassembling and assembling, and
servicing which cover procedures, precautions, factory specifications and
allowable limits.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are
based
on the latest production information available
at
the time
of
publication.
The
right
is
reserved
to
make changes in all information
at
any
time
without
notice.
August '95
©
KUBOTA
Corporation
1995
SPECIFICATIONS
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
SPECIFICATIONS [HST
type,
4WD,
Bi-speed
Turn]
Model
B1700 HSDB B2100 HSDB
B2400 HSDB
PTa
power
9.7
kW
(13.0 HP)* 12.0
kW
(16.0 HP)*
13.4
kW(18.0
HP)*
Maker
KUBOTA
Model
D905-D10 D1005-D10
D1105-D10
Type
Indirect Injection. Vertical, water-cooled, 4-cycle diesel
Number
of
cylinders
3
Bore and stroke
72
x 73.6 mm (2.83 x 2.90 in.)
76
x 73.6 mm (2.99 x 2.90 in.)
78 x 78.4 mm (3.07 x 3.09 in.)
Total displacement
898
cm
3
(54.8 cu.in.)
1001
cm
3
(61.1
cu.in.)
1123
cm
3
(68.5 cu.in.)
QJ
Engine gross
power
12.7
kW(17.0
HP)
15.7
kW
(21.0
HP)
17.9
kW(24.0
HP)
.=:
OJ
c
Rated
revolution
43.3
r/s
(2600 rpm)
w
Maximum
torque
51
N'm (38 ft-Ibs)
59
N'm (44 ft-Ibs)
67
N'm (50 ft-Ibs)
Battery
12V,RC:
71
min,CCA:
390A(12V,RC:
79
min,CCA:
433A)
Starting system Electric starting
with
cell starter 12V, 1.0
kW
Lubricating system Forced lubrication by trochoidal
pump
Cooling system Pressurized
radiator,
forced circulation
with
water
pump
Fuel
Diesel fuel NO.2-D [above-10°C (14°F)], Diesel fuel No.1 [below-10°C (14°F)]
Fuel
tank
24 i (6.3 U.S.gals,
5.3
Imp.gal)
VI
Enaine crankcase
3.0 i (3.2 U.S.qts, 2.6Imp.qts)
QJ
(WI
h
filter)
:p
'u
'"
Engine
coolant
3.4 i (3.6 U.S.qts, 2.6Imp.qts)
Q.
(3
Transmission
case
12.0 i (3.17 U.S.gals, 12.4lmp.gals)
Front axle
case
4.5 i (4.8 U.S.qts, 4.0 Imp.qts)
Overall
length
(without
3P)
2280 mm (89.8 in.) 2300 mm (90.6 in.)
2330 mm (91.7 in.)
Overall
width
(min.
tread)
989 mm (38.9 in.) 1077 mm (42.4 in.)
1175 mm (46.3 in.)
VI
Overall
height
(with
RaPS)
1915mm(75.4in.)
1940 mm (76.4 in.)
1965 mm (77.4 in.)
c
Overall
height
(top
of
seat) 1293 mm (50.9 in.) 1318 mm (51.9 in.)
1343 mm (52.9 in.)
0
'0;
c
Wheelbase 1500 mm (59.0 in.)
QJ
E
Ci
Min.
ground
clearance
270 mm (10.6 in.)
270 mm (10.6 in.)
285 mm (11.2 in.)
Front
855 mm (33.7 in.) 855 mm (33.7 in.)
855 mm (33.7 in,)
Treads
778
to
948 mm
836to
1006 mm
890
to
1064 mm
Rear
(30.6
to
37.3 in.) (32.9
to
39.6 in.)
(35.0
to
41.9 in.)
Weight
(with
RaPS)
645 kg (1422 Ibs)
657 kg (1449
Ibs)
672 kg (1482
Ibs)
Clutch
Dry single plate
Front 6-12
6-12
7-12
E
Tires
QJ
Rear
8.3-16
9.5-16
11.2-16
~
Steering
Integral type
power
steering
VI
OJ
,=:
Transmission
Main-hydrostatic transmission, High-Low
gear
shift
(2
forward,
2 reverse)
Qj
>
Brake
Wet
disk type
~
I-
Min.
turnin~
radius
(with
brake
2.1
m (6.9 feet)
E
Hydraulic
control
system
Position Control
QJ
~
Pump capacity
22
i/min
(5.8 gals/min)
VI
Three
point
hitch
,~
SAE
Category I
:>
At
lift
points
~
Max.
lift
580 kg (1280
Ibs)
-0
>.
force
24 in, behind
I
lift
points
460
kg
(1015Ibs)
."j:
Rear-PTO
SAE
1-3/8,6 splines
'"
Revolution
540 rpm
at
2600 engine rpm
.c
VI
0
Mid-PTO
USA
NO.5 (KUBOTA 10-tooth) involute spline
I-
0..
Revolution
2537 rpm
at
2600 engine rpm
Note:
*
Manufacture's
estimate
the
company reserves
the
right
to
change
the
specifications
without
notice,
D-1
B1700'B2100'B2400 WSM,11771
[2WD Type]
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
81700
E
(Manual
Transmission Type)
82400
HSE
(HST Type)
PTO
power
10.5 kW{14.0 HP)*
13.4 kW{1B.0 HP)*
Maker
KUBOTA
Model
D905-D10 D1105-D10
Type
Indirect Injection. Vertical, water-cooled, 4-cycle diesel
Number
of
cylinders
3
Bore and stroke
72
x 73.6 mm (2.83 x 2.90 in.) 78 x 78.4 mm (3.07 x 3.09 in.)
Total displacement
898
cm
3
(54.8 cu.in.)
1123
cm
3
(68.5 cu.in.)
QI
Engine gross
power
12.7 kW{17.0
HP)
17.9
kW
(24.0
HP)
c
OJ
Rated revolution
43.3
rls
(2600 rpm)
c
w
Maximum
torque
51
N'm (38 ft-Ibs)
67
N'm (50 ft-Ibs)
Battery
12V,
RC:
71
min,CCA:
390A{12V,
RC:
79
min,CCA:
433A)
Starting system
Electric starting
with
cell starter 12V, 1.0
kW
Lubricating system
Forced lubrication by trochoidal pump
Cooling system
Pressurized radiator, forced circulation
with
water
pump
Fuel
Diesel fuel
NO.2-D
[above-10°C
(14°F»),
Diesel fuel
NO.1
[below-10°C (14°F)]
Fuel
tank
241
(6.3 U.S.gals,
5.3
Imp.gal)
VI
Enaine crankcase
3.02 (3.2 U.S.qts, 2.6Imp.qts)
QI
(WI
h
filter)
:;::;
'u
to
Engine coolant
3.4
2 (3.6 U.S.qts, 2.6 Imp.qts)
a.
to
u
Transmission
case
11.02 (2.90 U.S.gals, 2.4lmp.gals) 12.02{3.17 U.S.gals, 12.4lmp.gals)
Front axle
case
-
Overall
length
(without
3P)
2280 mm (89.8 in.) 2330 mm (91.7 in.)
Overall
width
(min.
tread)
989 mm (38.9 in.) 1175 mm (46.3 in.)
VI
Overall
height
(with
ROPS)
1915 mm (75.4 in.) 1965 mm (77.4 in.)
c
0
Overall
height
(top
of
seat)
1293 mm (50.9 in.) 1343 mm (52.9 in.)
'Vi
c
Q)
Wheelbase
1500 mm (59.0 in.)
E
is
Min.
ground
clearance
295 mm (11.6 in.)
305 mm (12.0 in.)
Front
826 mm (32.5 in.) 900 mm (35.4 in.)
Treads
Rear 778
to
948 mm (30.6
to
37.3 in.) 890
to
1064
mm
(35.0t041.9
in.)
Weight
(with
ROPS)
575
kg (1268
Ibs)
612
kg
(1346Ibs)
Clutch Dry single plate
Front 5.00-10
6.50-10
Tires
E
Rear
8.3-16
11.2-16
QI
~
Steering
Integral type
power
steering
>,
VI
OJ
Main-hydrostatic transmission,
c
Tra
nsm
ission
Gear shaft, 6
forward
and 2 reverse
QI
High-Low gear shift
(2
forward,
2 reverse)
>
e
Brake
Wet
disk
type
I-
Min.
turnin~
radius
2.0 m (6.6
feet)
{with
brake
E
Hydraulic control system
Position Control
QI
Pump capacity
22
2/min (5.8 gals/min)
~
>,
VI
Three
point
hitch
.~
SAE
Category I
:>
At
lift
points
e
Max.
lift
580 kg (1280
Ibs)
'"0
>,
force 24 in, behind
I
lift
points
460 kg (1015Ibs)
4=
Rear-PTO
SAE
1-3/8,6
splines
to
Revolution
540 rpm
at
2600 engine rpm
..c
VI
0
Mid-PTO
USA
NO.5 (KUBOTA 1O-tooth) involute spline
I-
Q.
Revolution
2531
rpm
at
2600 engine rpm
2537 rpm
at
2600 engine rpm
Note: * Manufacture's estimate
the
company reserves
the
right
to
change
the
specifications
without
notice.
D-2
c
C1
~
-
~
s:
m
OJ
Z
~.
VI
3
m
0
r:::
Z
z
3
VI
Q..
V')
-
3
0
til
:::J
Z
!:!?
0
:::J
v;
'"
~
0
~
:::J
OJ
\0
OJ
:::J
~
-n
OJ
,
3
!:t.
,
til
<
OJ
:::::!.
OJ
!:t.
0
?
if
81700
2WD
826 (32.5)
82400
2WD
900 (35.4)
817004WD
82100
4WD
855 (33.7l
824004WD
81700
1293 (50.9)
82100
1318 (51.9)
82400 1343 (52.9)
'lD
....,
61700,778
(30.6)
to
948 (37.3)
0
62100, 836 (32.9)
to
1006 (39.6)
'?
lD
62400,890
(35.0)
to
1064 (41.9)
IV
81700 1915 (75.4)
I I
0
82100 1940 (76.4)
0
c
ci:J
82400 1965 (77.4)
:::J
IV
;:=i:
.l:>
81700989
(38.9)
0
0
82100 1077 (42.4)
3
~
824001175
(46.3)
3
Vl
-=:
:5:
:::J
~
..:....
~
'-l
'-l
'"
o
o
Oi
<0
9
"'''''''
NN~
.".~...,
000
000
coco
co
I'.)
1'.)->
+>-->-...1
000
000
I'.) I'.) I'.)
WWI'.)
wooo
000
<0<000
->
0
CD
~~~
lD
'-l
'-l
"T1
o
o
w
C1
I
W
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11771
[!1
GENERAL
[1] FEATURES
G GENERAL
8177P001
(1)
Integral Power Steering
(2)
Standard
Mid
PTO
(3)
Simultaneous
Mounting
of
Both
the
Mid
Mount
Mower
and Front Loader
(4)
E-TVCS
Diesel Engine
(5)
Engine Key
Shut-Off
System
(6)
Large Hydraulic Pump
(7)
Combination
Panel
of
Easy
Checker
(8)
Main Shift Lever Located in
the
Right
Side
of
Transmission
(9)
New
Design
(10) Variation
of
Transmission
(11)
Wet
Disc
Brake
(12) Position Control Valve
(13) Hydraulic Block Type
Outlet
(14) Rear Hydraulic
Outlet
(15) Auxiliary Control Valve (Option)
(16)
ROPS
(17) Bi-speed Turn
(Small
turning
radius)
DG-1
G
GENERAL
[2] LUBRICANTS,
FUEL
AND
COOLING WATER
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
Capacity
Place
I I
Lubricants, fuel and cooling
water
B1700 B2100 B2400
Front axle
case
4.58
KUBOTA
SUPER
UDTfluid
*
or
[4WD, Bi-speedl
4.8 U.S.qts.
SAE
80,
90
gear oil
4.0Imp.qts.
* KUBOTA original transmission hydraulic
fluid
Greasing
No.
of
greasing
point
Capacity Type
of
grease
Knuckle shaft
SAE
multi
purpose type
(2WD Type)
2
-
2
Moderate
amount
grease
Front axle support
(2WD Type)
[3] MA!NTENANCE
CH
ECK
LIST
Indication on hour meter
After
Check
point
(Change
or
check every interval shown
below)
purchase
Reference
No.
1
2
page
50
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
500
550 600
650
700 750
BOO
year
years
1 Greasing
0 0
0
0 0 0 0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DG-2
2
Front axle
case
oil (4WD)
0 0
DG-3
3
Greasing (2WD
front
wheel
0 0
DG-3
hub)
[4]
CHECK
AND
MAINTENANCE
A CAUTION
It
Be
sure
to
check and service
the
tractor
on a
flat
place
with
engine shut
off,
the
parking brake on and
chock
the
wheels.
(1) Check Points
of
Every
50
Hours
Greasing
1.
Apply grease
to
the
following
points. (2WD Type)
(1) Knuckle
Shaft
Grease Nipple
(2) Front
Axle
Support
Grease Nipple
DG-2
81700·82100'82400 WSM,11771
(2) Check Point
of
Every 300 Hours
G
GENERAL
Changing Front
Axle
Case
Oil
1.
Place
the
oil pans underneath
the
front
axle
case.
2.
Remove
the
both
right
and
left
hand side
drain
plugs (3) and
filling
plug (2)
to
drain
the
oil.
3. Remove
the
right
and
left
breather plugs.
4.
After
draining, reinstall
the
drain plugs (3).
5.
Fill
with
new
oil up
to
the
upper notch on
the
dipstick.
6.
After
filling,
reinstall
the
filling
plug and
breather
plugs.
II
IMPORTANT
•
After
ten
minutes,
check
the
oil
level
again,
add
oil
to
prescribed level.
•
Use
KUBOTA
SUPER
UDTfluid
or
SAE
80,
90
gear
oil.
Refer
to
"LUBRICANTS,
FUEL
AND COOLING WATER". (See
page DG·2.)
/
8177P321
(1)
8reather
Plug
(2) Filling Plug
with
Dipstick
(3) Drain Plug
(A) Oil level
is
acceptable
within
this range.
(3) Check Point
of
Every 400 Hours
Front axle
case
oil capacity
4.5.u
4.8
u.s.
qts
4.0 Imp. qts
8177FG33
(1) Front Wheel Hub Cover
Lubricate Grease Fitting
1.
Detach
the
cover, and apply bearing grease.
DG-3
G
GENERAL
[5] SPECIAL TOOLS
(1) Special Tools
for
Tractor
ST20F007
81700·82100'82400 WSM,11771
Knuckle Spindle Bushing Replacement Tool
Code No.: 07916-51030
Application: This allows
easy
press
fitting
and removal
of
knuckle spindle bushing
for
front
axle
without
use
of
press.
[6]
TIRES
(1) Type
of
Tire
• IMPORTANT
• Do
not
use
tires largerthan specified.
• When you intend
to
mount
different
size
of
tires
from
equipped ones, consult
your
dealer
about
front
drive gear ratio
for
detail.
Excessive
wear
of
tires may occur due
to
improper gear ratio.
The
following
tires
can
be
mounted on Models 81700,82100 and 82400.
Type
of
Tire
Type
of
tractor
Front Tire
Rear
Tire
Farm
Tire
Turf
Tire
2Wheel
Drive
2&4
Wheel
Drive
C045F069
0011Fl18
[81700]
5.00-10
[82400]
6.50-10
[81700,82100,
82400]
23
x 8.50-12
DG-4
C045F070
0011Fl18
[81700]
8.3-16
[82400]
11.2-16
[81700,82100,
82400]
33x12.5-15
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11771
(2) Tread
Adjustment
Front
Wheel
Front
tread
cannot
be adjusted.
[2WD Type]
G GENERAL
• IMPORTANT
• Do
not
turn
front
discs
to
obtain
wider
tread.
Models
Tires
Tread
8177FG34
B1700E
5.00-10 Farm
826mm
32.5 in.
8177FG35
B2400HSE
6.50-10 Farm
900mm
35.4 in.
900mm
(35.4 in,)
B1700E
B2400HSE
23 x 8.50-12
Turf
900mm
35.4 in.
900mm
~di:=;./
(35.4
in)
8177FG36
[Bi-speed Turn Type]
Models
Tires
Tread
0354F096
B1700HSDB
B2100HSDB
6-12 Farm
855mm
33.7 in.
855mm
,"
(33.7 in.)
0354F096
B2400HSDB
7-12 Farm
855mm
33.7 in.
855mm
(33.7 in.)
DG-5
0354F097
B1700HSDB
B2100HSDB
B2400HSDB
23
x 8.5-12
Turf
890mm
35.0 in.
890mm
(35.0 in.)
G
GENERAL
(3)
Wheel
Hub
0319Fon
(4) Tire Pressure
• Recommended inflation pressure
Maintain the
pressure
shown below.
Tire sizes
Inflation
Pressure
Front
5.00
-12,
4PR
270
kPa
(2.B kgf/cm
2
,
40 psi)
6.50 - 12,
4PR
200
kPa
(2.0 kgf/cm
2
,
28 psi)
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
FrontWheel
Hub
Type 2WD
Screw circle
diameter
(A)
120mm
4.7 in.
Number
of
screws
6
Screw
sizes
M12 x Pitch 1.25
Pilot bore
diameter
(B)
69.5
mm
2.74 in.
Hole spacing
(C)
Equal 1.05 rad
(60 deg.)
III
NOTE
• Maintain the maximum pressure
in
front tires, if
using a front loader or when equipped
with
lots
offront weight.
DG-6
B1700·B21 00·B2400
WSM,
11771
1 ENGINE
D
ENGINE
SERVICING
1
_
_
D_is_ta_nc_e_:_"
A_'_'
I
__
F_act_o_r_
y
_sp_e_c·
l_
18
_
m
_
m
_
0.71 in.
10mm
0.39 in.
(3) Bi-speed Turn Cable
Factory spec.
Distance:
"B"
(1) Spring Lock Pin
(2) Lock
Nut
(Reference)
Propeller Shaft Cover and Coupling and Drag Link on page
1-513
are altered
as
explained below.
Bi-speed Turn Cable
1.
Remove
the spring lock pin (1) and loosen
the
lock nuts (2)
and then remove
the
bi-speed turn cable (3).
(When reassembling)
• When reassembling the bi-speed turn cable (3), make sure
to
set the distance"
A".
B177P323
17.7
to
34.5
N'm
Tightening
torque
Slotted
nut
1.8
to
3.5
kgf·m
13
to
25.3 ft-Ibs
(When reassembling)
III
IMPORTANT
•
After
tightening the slotted
nut
to
the
specified
torque,
install the cotter pin
as
shown in the figure.
(2) Knuckle
Arm
(3) Coupling
(1)
DragLink
(1) Propeller
Shaft
Cover
(2) Spring
Pin
DrClg
Link
1.
Remove
the cotter pin and loosen the slotted nut.
2.
Disconnect the drag link
(1)
with
a pitman arm puller from
the knuckle arm
(2).
Propeller Shaft Cover and Coupling
1.
Loosen
the clamp and slide the propeller shaft cover (1)
to
the rear.
2.
Tap
out
the spring pin (2) and then slide
the
coupling (3)
to
the rear.
(When reassembling)
•
Apply
grease
to
the
splines
of
the
propeller
shaft
and
coupling
030F129
D1-S1
2
CLUTCH
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11771
CLUTCH
SERVICING
10mm
0.39 in.
(3) Bi-speed Turn Cable
Factory
spec.
Distance:
"B"
(1) Spring
Lock
Pin
(2)
Lock
Nut
(Reference)
Propeller Shaft Cover and Coupling on
2-56
are altered
as
explained below.
Bi-speed Turn Cable
1.
Remove
the spring lock pin
(1)
and
loosen the lock nuts
(2)
and then remove the bi-speed
turn
cable
(3).
(When reassembling)
CD
When reassembling the bi-speed
turn
cable
(3)
make sure
to
set the distance
II
A".
I
Distance:"
A"
'-F-act-o-r-
y
-sp-e-c.----,-1-6~-7r-I-~-.
-----
B177P323
(When reassembling)
•
Apply
grease
to
the
spl
ine
of
the
propeller
shaft
and
coupling.
Propeller Shaft Cover and Coupling
1.
Loosen
the clamp and slide the propeller shaft cover (1)
to
the rear.
2.
Tap
out
the spring pin
(2)
and then slide the coupling
(3)
to
the rear.
(1) Propeller Shaft Cover
(2)
Spring
Pin
(3)
Coupling
D2-S1
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
3 TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
SERVICING
18mm
0.71
in.
1
10mm
0.39
In.
(3)
Bi-speed Turn Cable
Factory
spec.
Factory
spec.
(1) Spring Lock
Pin
(2)
Lock
Nut
(Reference)
I Distance:
"B"
I
Distance:"
A"
Propeller
Shaft
Cover and Coupling on page
3-S13
and
3-S20
are altered
as
explained
below.
Bi-speed Turn Cable
1.
Remove
the
spring lock pin (1) and loosen
the
lock nuts (2)
and
then
remove
the
bi-speed
turn
cable (3).
(When reassembling)
•
When
reassembling
the
bi-speed
turn
cable (3) make sure
to
set
the
distance"
A".
B177P323
Propeller Shaft Cover and Coupling
1.
Loosen
the
clamp and slide
the
propeller
shaft cover (1)
to
the
rear.
2.
Tap
out
the
spring pin (2) and
then
slide
the
coupling
(3)
to
the
rear.
(When reassembling)
..
Apply
grease
to
the
spline
of
the
propeller
shaft
and
coupling.
(1)
Propeller Shaft Cover
(2)
Spring
Pin
(3)
Coupling
D3-S1
4
REAR
AXLE
mREAR AXLE
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
SERVICING
8mm
0.31
in.
Factory spec.
(1) Brake
Rod
(2) Spring
(3) Lever Holding Plate
(4) Bi-speed Turn Cable
(Reference)
Rear axle
case
mounting
39to44
N'm
Tightening
torque
4.0
to
4.5
k~.m
screws
29
to
33
ft- s
I
Distance:
"B"
Factory
spec.
I
19
mm
.
---L
0_.7_5_1n_.
---'
(5) Cable Support
(6) Differential Lock
Rod
(7)
Rear
Axle
Case
(8) Bi-speed Turn Lever
Rod
IDista
nce
:
"A"
UBI!
Rear
Axle
Case
on page 4-52
is
altered
as
explained below.
Rear
Axle
Case
1.
Disconnectthe brake rod
(1).
2.
Remove the spring
(2)
and lever holding plate (3).
3.
Loosen
the
lock nuts and remove the bi-speed
turn
cable (4)
from
cable support (5).
4.
Disconnect the differential lock rod (6).
5.
Remove the rear axle
case
mounting screw.
6.
Separate
the
rear axle
case
(7)
from the
differential
case.
(When reassembling)
CD
Apply
liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D
or
equivalent)
to
joint
face
of
the rear axle
case
and
differential
gear ease
after
eliminating
the
water, oil and stuck
liquid
gasket.
CD
When reassembling the bi-speed
turn
cable (4), make sure
to
set
the
distance"
A".
B177F410
D4-S1
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
5
BRAKES
~
BRAKES
SERVICING
8mm
0.31
in.
(5) Cable Support
(6)
Differential
Lock
Rod
(7) Rear Axle
Case
(8) Bi-speed Turn Lever
Rod
Factory
spec.
Factory
spec.
I
19mm
0.75 in.
-----------'--------
(1) Brake
Rod
(2) Spring
(3) Lever Holding Plate
(4) Bi-speed Turn Cable
(Reference)
Rear axle
case
mounting
39
to
44 N'm
Tightening
torque
4.0
to
4.5
kgf'm
screws
29
to
33
ft-I
bs
I
Distance:"
A"
I Distance:
"B"
Rear Axle
Case
with
Brake Assembly on page
5-S5
is
altered
as
explained below.
Rear
Axle
Case
1.
Disconnect the brake rod (1).
2.
Remove
the
spring
(2)
and lever holding plate (3).
3.
Loosen
the
lock nuts and remove
the
bi-speed
turn
cable
(4)
from
cable support (5).
4.
Disconnect
the
differential lock rod (6).
5.
Remove the rear axle
case
mounting
screw.
6.
Separate the rear axle
case
(7)
from
the
differential
case.
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D
or
equivalent)
to
joint
face
of
the
rear axle
case
and
differential
gear
ease
after
eliminating the water, oil and stuck
liquid
gasket.
• When reassembling the bi-speed
turn
cable (4), make sure
to
set
the
distance"
A".
II
All
IIBlI
B177F410
D5-S1
6
FRONT
AXLE
[EI
FRONT AXLE
MECHANISM
[1] STRUCTURE
(1)
Two
Wheel
Drive Type
2
0319F135
4'f----------llt-\\
5)...------~~
6\-----------r1
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
(1) Front Axle
(2) Center
Pin
(3) Knuckle Arm
(4) Bushing
(5)
Thrust Ball Bearing
(6)
Knuckle Shaft
(7) Front Wheel Hub
(8) Slotted Nut
(9)
Ball Bearing
The
front
axle
of
the
2WD type
is
constructed
as
shown above.
The knuckle shaft (6)
is
attached
to
the
front
axle
(1) by
the
"RUMOAN" method.
With
this method,
the
shape
of
the
front
axle
is
relatively simple, and
the
front
axle
is
supported
at
its
center
with
center
pin
(2),
so
that
steering
operation
is
stable
even
on
an uneven
ground
encountered in a farm fields.
D6-M1
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
(2) Bi-speed Turn Type
6
FRONT
AXLE
B177F610
(1) Bi-speed Turn Lever
(2) Bi-speed Turn
Rod
(3)
Bi-speed Turn Change
Cable
(4)
Shift
Rod
(5) Shift Lever
(6) Shift Lever Fulcrum
(7) Change Fork
(8)
Change Lever
(9)
Shift
Cam
(10) Bi-speed Turn
Case
(11) Shift Roller Shaft
(12) Spring
(13) Bi-speed Turn Shift Fork
(14) Shifter
(15) Coupling
(16) Clutch
Disc
(17) Friction Plate
(18) Clutch Drum
(19) 18TGear
(20) Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
(21) Front Differential
Assembly
(22) Bevel Gear
(23) Gear Shaft
(24) Gear Shaft
(25) Bi-speed Turn Gear
Case
B177F611
The
front
axle
with
bi-speed
turn
is
constructed
as
shown above. Front wheel speed change mechanism,
which
is
located in
the
bi-speed
turn
gear
case
(25)
and bi-speed
turn
case
(10), consists
of
the
bi-speed
turn
lever (1),
shift
rod (4),
shift
cam (9),
shift
fork
(13), bi-speed
turn
clutch assembly (14
to
18), gears
(19) (23) (24) and
so
on.
D6-M2
6
FRONT
AXLE
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
III Bi-speed Turn Power Train
[Standard 4WD]
11)-----H-~
10
Bi-speed clutch
is
mechanically engaged
when
front
wheel reaches
approximately
0.42 rad. (24°)
turning
angle.
This bi-speed
turn
front
wheel speed
is
1.53
times
higher than
the
standard
front
wheel speed.
III Standard 4WD
21T
Gear Shaft
(3)
~
Shifter (4)
~
Bi-speed Turn
Coupling
(8)
~
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft (11)
~
Front
Axle.
III Bi-speed Turn 4WD
21T
Gear Shaft
(3)
~
13T-10T Gear Shaft
(5)
~
18T
Gear
(1
0)
~
Bi-speed Turn Clutch Drum (9)
~
Friction
Plate
(7)
~
Clutch
Disc
(6)
~
Bi-speed Turn Coupling
(8)
~
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft (11)
~
Front Axle.
(1
)
Shift Fork
(10)
18TGear
(2)
Shifter Collar
(11)
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
(3)
21TGearShaft
(12)
Shift
Rod
(4)
Shifter
(13)
Shift Roller Shaft
(5)
13T-1
OT
Gear Shaft
(14)
Shift Roller
(6)
Clutch Disk
(15)
Shift
Cam
(7)
Friction Plate
(16)
Shift Lever
(8)
Bi-speed Turn Coupling
(17)
Change Fork
(9)
Bi-speed Turn Clutch Drum
(18)
Change Lever
III Bi-speed
Cam
(5) Spring
(6) Change Lever
(7) Shift Lever
(B)
Bi-speed
turn
"OFF"
(D)
More
than
0.44 rad. (25°)
Bi-speed
turn
4WD and standard 4WD positions
are selected by change lever
(6)
to
move
the
position
of
shift
cam
(1). This lever
is
operated by
the
bi-speed
turn
change lever located on
the
right
side
of
the
clutch housing.
III Standard 4WD Position
The
bi-speed
turn
change lever
is
shifted
to
the
"OFF" position.
The
shift
cam
(1)
is
free
to
turn,
so
that
the
shift
rod
(2)
and
shift
fork
(4)
are remained in standard
4WD position by springs (3), (5).
III Bi-speed Turn 4WD Position
The
bi-speed
turn
change lever
is
shifted
to
the
"ON"
position.
When
the
steering
wheel
is
turned
more
than
approx. 0.44 rad. (25°)
turning
angle,
the
shift lever
(7) and
shift
cam
(1)
are turned together. This
cam
make the
shift
rod (2) move the
arrow
direction
so
that
the shifter
is
engaged
with
the
bi-speed
turn
clutch.
When
the
steering
wheel
is
turned
less
than
approx. 0.40 rad. (23°)
turning
angle, the
shift
rod
doesn't move in spite
of
the
cam
rotation.
(1) Shift
Cam
(2) Shift
Rod
(3) Spring
(4) Shift Fork
(A) Bi-speed
turn
"ON"
(C)
Less
than
0.40 rad. (23°)
turning
angle
(D)
3
[Bi-speed Turn 4WD]
(C) 3
'II
~
B177F614
B177F615
D6-M3
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771 6
FRONT
AXLE
[2] FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
To assure smooth
mobility
or
maneuverability and
enhance
stable
and
straight
running,
the
front
wheels are
mounted
at
an angle
to
the
right,
left
and
forward
directions.
This
arrangement
is
referred
to
as
the
Front Wheel Alignment.
[Camber]
[Kingpin Angle]
,1.1
I
a
r
-f-
1r-1
o
.-J
\\
---->\
II
I)
111111
C045F051
C045F053
The
front
wheels are
tilted
from
the
vertical
as
viewed
from
the
front,
upper wheels are spreader
than
lower
ones.
This
inclination
is
called camber (a). Camber
reduces
bending
or
twisting
of
the
front
axle
caused by vertical load
or
running resistance, and
also maintains
the
stability in running.
The kingpin
is
tilted
from the vertical
as
viewed
from
the
front.
This angle
is
called kingpin angle (a).
As
with
the
camber, kingpin angle reduces rolling resistance
of
the
wheels, and prevents any shimmy
motion
of
the
steering wheel.
It
also reduces steering
effort.
Camber
2WD
4WD
0.035 rad.
2
0
Kin~pin
inclination
0.140 rad.
(8°)
0.209 rad. (12°)
[Caster]
Front
Rear
[Toe-in]
Front
t
Rear
C045F052
C045F054
The
kingpin
is
tilted
forward
as
viewed
from
the
side. The
point
(b)
of
the
wheel
center
line
is
behind
the
point
(a)
of
the
kingpin
shaft
center
line.
This inclination
is
called caster
(c).
Caster helps
provide steering stability.
As
with
the
kingpin
inclination, caster reduces
steering
effort.
Viewing
the
front
wheels
from
above reveals
that
the
distance between
the
toes
of
the
front
wheels
is
smaller than
that
between the heels.
It
is
called toe-in. The
front
wheels tend
to
roll
outward
due
to
the
camber,
but
toe-in offsets
it
and ensures parallel
rolling
of
the
front
wheels.
Another
purpose
of
toe-in
is
to
prevent excessive
and uneven
wear
of
tires.
1
to
10
mm
0.04
to
0.39 in.
2WD
4WD
Toe-in
Caster
2WD 0 rad.
I I
4WD
0°
------1----...1.------------1
'-----------
----J
D6-M4
6
FRONT
AXLE
SERVICING
TROUBLESHOOTING
[2WD
TYPE]
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
Symptom
Probable
Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
FrontWheels
Wander
• Clearance between center pin and pin
Replace
D6-S6,
S12
to
Right
or
Left
support excessive (2WD)
• Improper
toe-in
adjustment
(improper
Adjust -
alignment)
GIl
Knuckle shaft bushing
worn
(2WD)
Replace
D6-S6,
S12
•
Tire pressure uneven
Inflate DG-6
[BI-SPEED TURN TYPE]
Bi·speed Turn System
•
Bi-speed
turn
clutch
friction
torque
too
low
Adjust
D6-S13
Does
Not
Operate
or
•
Shift
fork
spring weaken
or
damaged Replace
D6-S14
Slipping
•
Shift
fork
deformed,
worn
or
broken Replace
D6-S13
•
Change
fork
deformed
or
broken
Replace
D6-S11
•
Shift cam rusted
Repair
or
Replace
D6-S10
•
Shift roller
worn
Replace
D6-S10
•
Clutch disc
worn
Replace
D6-S12,
S14
• Friction plate
worn
or
deformed
Replace D6-S12,
S14
GIl
Gear broken Replace
D6-S11
• Shifter collar
worn
Replace
D6-S12
•
Wrong
assembly
of
shift
cam
Reinstall
D6-S
10
•
Wrong
linkage adjustment
Readjust
D6-S7
Bi·speed Turn Does
• Shift
fork
deformed
Replace
D6-S
13
Not
Return
to
• Shift cam deformed
Replace
D6-S
10
Standard 4WD
•
Wrong
linkage adjustment
Readjust
D6-S7
Position
Different
Bi·speed
•
Shift rod
improperly
adjusted Adjust
D6-S4
Turn Starting
Angle
•
Shift
lever and
shift
cam
improperly Reassemble
D6-S
10
Between Right and
assembled
Left
turning
• Shift cam
worn
Replace
D6-S10
SERVICING SPECifiCATIONS
[2WD
TYPE]
Item
Factory Specification
Allowable
Limit
Center
Pin
to
Pin
Support
Clearance 0.05
to
0.25 mm
0.70 mm
0.0020
to
0.0098 in.
0.0276 in.
Center Pin O.D.
24.90
to
25.00 mm
-
0.9803
to
0.9842 in.
Pin
Support
I.D.
25.05
to
25.15 mm
-
0.9862
to
0.9901
in.
D6-S1
B1700'B2100'B2400 WSM,11771
SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
[2WD
TYPE]
6
FRONT
AXLE
Item
Factory Specification
Allowable
Limit
Knuckle Shaft
to
Bushing Clearance 0.040
to
0.105 mm 0.50 mm
0.0016toO.0041 in. 0.0197 in.
Knuckle Shaft O.D.
24.948
to
24.980 mm
-
0.9822
to
0.9835 in.
Bushing I.D.
25.020
to
25.053 mm -
0.9850
to
0.9863 in.
FrontWheel
Alignment
Toe-in
Ot010mm
-
o
to
0.39 in.
Camber
Angle
0.035 rad.
-
2.0
0
Caster Angle Orad.
-
0
0
King
Pin
0.209 rad.
Incl ination
120
FrontWheel
Steering
Angle
0.84
to
0.87 rad.
-
48
0
to
50
0
Axial Sway
Ot03mm
-
OtoO.118in.
[BI-SPEED TURN TYPE]
Bi-speed Turn Clutch
Dynamic Friction
441.3
to
490.4 N'm
-
torque
of
bi-speed
45
to
50
kgf'm
turn
clutch on
the
325.5
to
361.7 ft-Ibs
front
axle wheel
hub
Shift
Fork
to
Shifter Groove
(with
Shifter Clearance
0.1toO.7mm
1.0mm
Collar)
0.004
to
0.028 in.
0.04in.
Bi-speed Turn Spring (short)
Free
Length 32.5
to
33.5 mm
-
1.280to
1.319 in.
Maximum
Setting 25.5 mm, 1.00 in.
25.5 mm, 1.00 in.
Length
(load 1613
N,
(load
1411
N,
143.9
164.5
kgf'm,
362.71bs)
kgf,317.4Ibs)
Bi-speed Turn Spring (long)
Free
Length 52.0 mm, 2.047 in.
-
Setting Length
35.0 mm, 1.378 in.
35.0 mm, 1.378 in.
(load 86.3
N,
8.8 kgf,
(load 75.5
N,
19.41bs)
7.7kgf,17.0Ibs)
Bi-speed Turn Clutch
Disc
Thickness
1.7to
1.9
mm
1.4mm
0.067
to
0.075 in.
0.055 in.
Bi-speed Turn Friction Plate
Thickness
0.95
to
1.05 mm
0.8mm
0.037
to
0.041
in.
0.0315 in.
D6-S2
6
FRONT
AXLE
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torques
of
screws and nuts on
the
table
below
are especially specified.
[2WDTYPE]
Item
N'm
kgf'm
ft-Ibs
Front wheel
mounting
screw 77.4
to
90.2
7.9
to
9.2
57.2
to
66.5
Front wheel hub slotted
nut
117.6to 156.8
12
to
16
86.8
to
115.7
Knuckle arm
mounting
bolts and nuts 77.4
to
90.2 7.9
to
9.2
57.2
to
66.5
Tie rod end slotted
nut
48.1
to
55.9
4.9t05.7
35.5t041.2
Center pin slotted
nut
Less
than 9.8
Less
than
1.0
Less
than
7.2
Lock plate
mounting
nut
17.7t019.6
1.8to
2.0
13.0to
14.5
[BI-SPEED TURN TYPE]
Shift lever fulcrum
mounting
screws
17.7t020.5
1.8
to
2.1
13.0to
15.2
Bi-speed
turn
case
mounting
screws
23.6to
27.4
2.4to
2.8
17.4
to
20.2
Bi-speed
turn
gear
case
mounting
screws
23.6to
27.4
2.4to
2.8
17.4to
20.2
Bearing
holder
mounting
screws
48.1
to
55.8
4.9t05.7
35.5
to
41.2
Case
cover
mounting
screw
17.7to
20.5
1.8t02.1
13.0
to
15.2
Bi-speed
turn
gear
case
mounting
screw
23.6t027.4
2.4
to
2.8
17.4to
20.2
Spiral bevel pinion shaft staking
nut
127t0167
13
to
17
94.0
to
123.0
CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING
AND
SERVICING
CHECKING
AND
ADJUSTING
(1)
2WD
Type
III
NOTE
•
Adjust
the
steering angle
with
the adjusting
bolt
at
the
right
side
when
the steering wheel
is
turned
counter clockwise,
and adjust
with
the
adjusting
bolt
at
the
left
side
when
it
is
turned
clockwise.
•
After
adjustment, secure the adjusting bolts
with
the lock
nut.
Front Wheel Steering Angle
1.
Inflate
the
tires
to
the
specified pressure.
2.
Place
the
turning
radius gauge under the
front
wheels.
3.
Steer
the
wheels
to
the extreme
right
and
left,
and measure
the
steering angle.
4.
If
the
angle
is
not
within
the factory specifications, adj ust
with
the adjusting
bolt
(1).
0.84
to
0.87 rad.
48°to
50°
Factory
spec.
Frontwheel
steering angle
(1) Adjusting Bolt
D6-S3
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
6
FRONT
AXLE
(2) Bi-speed Turn Type
Steering inner
angle*
0040
to
0044
rad.
(When i-speed
turn
Factory spec.
23°to
25
0
neutral)
* When the wheels are steered
to
more than 0.44 rad. (25°),
the bi-speed
turn
starts
to
work.
liliiii
NOTE
5.
When you adjust the bi-speed
turn
shift
rod,
be
sure
the
angle
of
the
shift rod end
is
the same
as
the angle in
the
figure left.
I
84mm
3.3
in.
(2) Bi-speed
Case
Change Lever
(2) Steering Inner Angle
I Factory
spec.
Distance"
A"
IJA"
(1) Bi-speed Turn Shift
Rod
B177P323
(1) Bi-speed Turn Lever
Bi-speed Turn Shift
Rod
1.
Set the
front
wheel drive lever
to
the
4WD position.
2.
Hoist
the
front
of
the
tractor
to
a position where you can
turn
the
front
wheels
with
your hands.
3.
Turn
the
steering wheel and set
the
steering angle
of
the
inside
tire
to
0.42 rad. (24°).
At
this time, make sure both
the
left
and
right
tires
turn
simultaneously in the
same
direction.
4.
If
both tires
do
not
turn
in
the
same direction, adjust
length
"A"
of
the
bi-speed
turn
shift
rod
while
being careful
not
to
change
the
steering angle.
(Set
the
neutral position
when
4WD and bi-speed changes
at
0.42 rad. (24°).)
Bi-speed Turn Change Cable
1.
Set the bi-speed
turn
lever
(1)
to
the Bi-speed
"ON"
position.
2.
Push
the
bi-speed
case
change lever
(2)
to
the
rear (Bi-speed
"ON"
direction), and make sure there
is
no play in
the
lever.
3.
If
there
is
play in
the
lever, adjust
the
bi-speed
turn
cable
inner
length"
A".
(Reference)
B177F611
B177F612
D6-S4
6
FRONT
AXLE
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING
[1]
2WD
TYPE
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11771
Front Wheel Hub
1.
Remove
the
front
wheels.
2.
Remove the
front
wheel
caps.
3.
Remove
the
cotter pin and slotted nuts.
4.
Remove
the
front
wheel hub
with
a puller.
(When reassembling)
• Bend the cotter pin
as
shown in
the
figure
below.
0302F117
Tightening
torque
0310F156
Front wheel mounting
screw
Slotted
nut
77.4
to
90.2 N'm
7.9
to
9.2
kgf'm
57.2
to
66.5 ft-Ibs
118to
157 N'm
12
to
16
kgf'm
86.8
to
115.7 ft-Ibs
Knuckle arm mounting
77.4
to
90.2 N'm
7.9to9.2
kgf'm
bolt
and
nut
57.2
to
66.5 ft-Ibs
Tightening
torque
Slotted
nut
for
tie-rod
48.1
to
55.9 N'm
end
4.9
to
5.7
kgf·m
35.5
to
41.2 ft-Ibs
Tie-rod and Knuckle Arm
1.
Pull
out
the cotter pins, and loosen
the
slotted nuts.
2.
Remove the tie-rod (1) and drag
link
(3)
with
the
tie-rod end
lifter.
(Code
No.
07909-39021)
3.
Remove the knuckle arm (2).
(When reassembling)
030F128
(1)
Tie-rod
(2)
Knuckle Arm
D6-55
(3)
Drag Link
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771 6
FRONT
AXLE
Less
than
9.8N·m
Slotted
nut
1.0
k~f.m
7.23 t-Ibs
Tightening
torque
Lock plate
mounting
17to
19.6 N'm
1.8
to
2.0 kgf·m
nut
13.0
to
14.5 ft-Ibs
Knuckle Shaft
1.
Remove
the
knuckle shaft (1)
from
the
front
axle assembly.
(When reassembling)
• Install
the
thrust
bearing
(2) and
collar
(3)
in
its
proper
direction.
(3)
Collar
Separation
of
Front
Axle
and Front
Axle
Frame
1.
Remove
the
set spring (1).
2. Remove
the
slotted nut.
3. Remove
the
lock plate (2), and pull
out
the
center
pin
(3)
to
forward.
4.
Separate
the
front
axle
from
the
front
axle frame.
(When reassembling)
•
After
reassembling
the
center
pin,
apply
grease
until
it
overflows
from
the
end.
(1) Knuckle Shaft
(2) Thrust Bearing
II1II
NOTE
• Tighten
the
slotted
nut
to
9.8
N'm
(1.0
kgf'm,
7.23 ft-Ibs).
If
the
slot
and pin hole
do
not
meet, loosen
the
nut
until
they
do
meet, and
then
install
the
set spring.
• When
installing
the
set spring (1), insert
it
from
the
left
side,
as
shown
in
figure.
C023F004
B177P332
(1)
Set
Spring
(2) Lock Plate
(3)
Center
Pin
D6-S6
6
FRONT
AXLE
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11771
[2] BI-SPEED TURN
TYPE
(1) Separating Front Axle
Bi-speed Turn Cable
1.
Remove
the
spring lock pin (1) and loosen
the
lock nuts
(2)
and then remove
the
bi-speed
turn
cable (3).
(When reassembling)
.. When reassembling
the
bi-speed
turn
cable (3), make sure
the
distance
"A".
Draining Front Axle
Case
Oil
1.
Place
oil
pans
underneath the
front
axle
case.
2.
Remove both
right
and
left
drain plugs
(3)
and
filling
plug
(2)
to
drain the oil.
3.
Remove
the
right
and
left
breather
pi
ugs.
4.
After
draining, reinstall
the
drain plugs (3).
5.
Fill
with
new oil up
to
the
upper notch on
the
dipstick.
6.
After
filling, reinstall the
filling
plug and breather plugs.
III IMPORTANT
•
After
ten
minutes,
check
the
oil
level
again,
add
oil
to
prescribed level.
..
Use
KUBOTA
SUPER
UOT
fluid
or
SAE
80,90 gear oil.
Refer
to
"LUBRICANTS,
FUEL
AND
COOLING
WATER",
(See
page
OG-2,)
(1)
Breather Plug
(2) Filling
Plug
with
Dipstick
(3) Drain Plug
(A) Oil level
is
acceptable
within
this range.
18mm
0.71
in.
10mm
0.39 in.
4.51
4.8 U.S.qts.
4.0Imp.qts.
(3)
Bi-speed Turn Cable
Factory
spec.
Factory
spec.
Distance: "A"
Distance:
"B"
Front axle
case
oil capacity
(1)
Spring Lock
Pin
(2)
Lock
Nut
(Reference)
8177P323
06-57
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11771
6
FRONT
AXLE
17.7to34.3
N'm
Tightening
torque
Slotted
nut
1.8
to
3.5
kgf'm
13.0
to
25.3 ft-Ibs
Propeller Shaft
1.
Loosen
the
clamp (4) and slide
the
propeller shaft cover (1)
to
the
rear.
2. Tap
out
the
spring pin (2), and then slide
the
coupling (3)
to
the rear.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease
to
the
splines
of
the
propeller shaft.
Drag Link
1.
Steer
the
front
wheels
to
the
left.
2. Remove
the
slotted
nut
and disconnect
the
drag
link
(2)
from
the knuckle arm (1).
liliiii
IMPORTANT
•
After
tightening
the
slotted
nut
to
the
specified
torque,
install
the
cotter
pin
as
shown
in the
figure
left.
(3) Coupling
(4) Clamp
(1) Propeller Shaft Cover
(2) Spring
Pin
(1) KnuckleArm (2) Drag Link
030F129
Front Axle
1.
Place
the
jack under
the
clutch housing.
2.
Place
the
jack underthe
front
axle.
3.
Remove
the
front
wheels.
4. Remove
the
front
axle brackets (Front and
Rear)
mounting
screws.
5.
Separate
the
front
axle
from
the
front
axle frame.
Front axle bracket
124to
147 N'm
mounting screws
12.6
to
15.0
k~f.m
Tightening
torque
91.1
to
108.5 t-Ibs
Front wheel mounting
77.5
to
90.2 N'm
7.9to9.2
kgf'm
screws
57.1
to
66.5 ft-Ibs
D6-S8
6
FRONT
AXLE
(2) Disassembling FrontAxle
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
Tie-rod and Bevel Gear
Case
Assembly
1.
Remove
the
bi-speed
turn
rod (1).
2.
Remove
the
slotted
nut
and disconnect
the
tie-rod (2)
from
the
front
gear
case
(3).
3.
Remove
the
bevel gear
case
(4)
and
front
gear
case
(3)
as
a
unit
from
the
front
axle
case
(5).
(When reassembling)
..
Apply
grease
to
the
O-ri ng and take care
not
to
damage it.
48
Do
not
interchange
right
and
left
bevel gear
case
assemblies.
B177P329
(1) Bi-speed Turn
Rod
(2) Tie-rod
(3) Front Gear
Case
B177P335
(1) Bi-speed Turn
Case
(2) Bi-speed
turn
Gear
Case
(4) Bevel Gear
Case
(5) Front Axle
Case
(3) Screws
with
Adhesive
17.7to34.3
N'm
Slotted
nut
1.8
to
3.5
kgf'm
Tightening
torque
13.0
to
25.3 ft-Ibs
Bevel gear
case
123.5
to
147.0 N'm
12.6
to
15.0
ktm
mounting screw
91.2to
108.4 t-Ibs
separation
of
Bi-speed Turn
Case
1.
Remove
the
bi-speed
turn
case
mounting
screws
and
separate
the
bi-speed
turn
case
(1)
from
the
bi-speed
turn
gear
case
(2).
(When reassembling)
..
Apply
liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D
or
equivalent)
to
joint
face
of
the
bi-speed
turn
case
(1)
and bi-speed
turn
gear
case
.
..
Apply
liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D
or
equivalent)
to
threads
of
screws
(3).
48
Install
the
bi-speed
turn
case
to
the
bi-speed
turn
gear
case,
noting
the
position
of
shifter collar. (Place
the
shifter collar
between
shift
fork
and shifter)
Bi-speed
turn
case
23.6to27.4N·m
Tightening
torque
2.4
to
2.8
kgf'm
mounting
screw
17.4
to
20.2 ft-Ibs
..
After
shifting
the
bi-speed
turn
shifter
to
the
spiral bevel
pinion shaft side,
mount
the
shift
fork
on
the
shifter
and
install
the
case
to
the gear
case.
D6-S9
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771 6
FRONT
AXLE
Case
cover mounting
17.7
to
20.5 N'm
Tightening
torque
1.8to
2.1
kgf'm
screw
13.0to
15.2 ft-Ibs
Shift
Cam
1.
Remove
the
case
cover
(2)
with
the
shift lever and shift
cam
(5).
2.
Remove
the
external
snap
ring
(4)
and collar (3).
3.
Remove
the
shift lever (1).
II1II
NOTE
•
The
white
marks
is
painted on
the
shift
lever (1)
for
aligning
the
shift
cam.
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D
or
equivalent)
to
joint
face
ofthe
bi-speed
turn
case
(6) and
case
cover (2).
• When installing
the
shift cam,
be
sure
to
align
the
marks on
the shift
cam
and shift lever.
(1) Shift Lever
(2)
Case
Cover
(3)
Collar
(4)
External Snap
Ring
(5)
Shift
Cam
(6)
Bi-speed Turn
Case
\?
3 ®
Shift Roller Shaft
1.
Remove
the
cover (1).
2.
Remove
the
nut
(2)
and
the
shift roller shaft
ass'y.
3.
Tap
out
the
shift roller shaft (3),
while
holding
the
bearing
(5)
to
remove
the
shift roller
(6).
The
retainer
ring
(7)
is
mounted inside
ofthe
roller.
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D
or
equivalent)
to
joint
face
ofthe
cover
(1)
and bi-speed
turn
case.
B022P005
(1) Cover
(2) Nut
(3) Shift Roller Shaft
(4)
Adjusting
Shim
D6-S
10
(5)
Ball Bearing
(6)
Shift Roller
(7)
Retainer
Ring
6
FRONT
AXLE
B022F037
(1) Spring
Pin
(2) Pressure Collar
(3) Spring
(4) Shift Fork
(5) Spring
(6) Spring
Pin
< •
B177P337
r-------<([j)
r------@
(7) Shift
Rod
(8) Shift
Rod
Collar
(9) Spring
Pin
(10) Change Fork
(11) Change Lever
(12)
Cap
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
Shift
Fork, Shift
Rod
and Change Lever
1.
Push
the
shift
fork
to
the
front
till
the
spring pin
(1)
can
be
seen
and
tap
out
the
spring pin (1).
2.
Remove the cap (12) and
tap
out
the shift rod
(7)
to
the
front.
3.
Tap
out
the spring pin
(6).
4.
Tap
out
the
shift
rod collar
(8)
by
the
rod
to
the
front.
5.
Take
off
the
shift
fork
(4), springs
(3)
(5)
and pressure collar
(2)
together.
6.
Tap
out
the
spring pin (9), using
the
screw hole
for
the
fulcrum
mounting
screw on the
case.
Remove
the
change
lever (11) and change
fork
(10).
(When reassembling)
..
Apply
adhesive
to
the
cap.
Separation
of
Bi-speed Turn Gear
Case
1.
Remove the bi-speed
turn
gear
case
mounting
screws (1).
2.
Separate the bi-speed
turn
gear
case
(2)
from
the
bearing
holder
(3).
(When reassembling)
..
Apply
liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D
or
equivalent)
to
the
bi-speed
turn
gear
case.
Bi-speed
turn
gear
case
23.6
to
27.4
N·m
Tightening
torque
2.4
to
2.8
kgf'm
mounting
screw
17.4
to
20.2 ft-Ibs
B177P343
(1) Bi-speed Turn Gear
Case
(2) Bearing Holder
Ball Bearing and Oil
Seal
1.
Remove the oil
seal
(1)
and remove
the
external snap ring
(3)
and thrust collar
(4).
2.
Tap
out
the
gear shaft (7).
3.
Remove
the
internal
snap
ring
(6) and remove
the
ball
bearing
(5)
from
the bi-speed
turn
gear
case
(2).
4.
Remove
the
ball bearing
(8)
from the bi-speed
turn
gear
case
(2).
B022F038
2
(When reassembling)
..
Apply
grease
to
the oil seal.
(1) Oil
Seal
(2) Bi-speed Turn Gear
Case
(3) External Snap Ring
(4) Thrust Collar
D6-S
11
(5) Ball Bearing
(6) Internal Snap
Ring
(7)
Gear Shaft
(8) Ball Bearing
B1700'B2100'B2400 WSM,11771
6
FRONT
AXLE
Tightening
torque
Bi-speed Turn Clutch Assembly
1.
Put back the stakes
of
the
nut
(1)
and remove it.
2.
Pull
out
the ball bearing
(2)
with
a puller and remove
the
plain washer
(3)
shifter collar
(4)
and shifter
(5).
3.
Remove
the
bi-speed
turn
coupling (6), clutch discs (7),
friction plates (8), collar
(14)
and bi-speed
turn
clutch drum
(13).
4.
Remove
the thrust collar (10), bi-speed
turn
gear (11) and
inner ring
(12)
from the bi-speed turn clutch drum (13).
5.
Remove
the gear shaft (15).
(When reassembling)
•
Apply
molybdenum
desulphid
(Three
Bond 1901
or
equivalent)
to
the inner ring.
•
Replace
the staking
nut
with
a new one and tighten the
nut
and
be
sure
to
stake it.
(9) Bearing Holder
(10) Thrust Collar
(11) Bi-speed Turn Gear
(12) Inner
Ring
(13) Bi-speed Turn
Clutch Drum
(14) Collar
(15) Gear Shaft
B177P338
(1) Nut
(2) Ball Bearing
(3) Plain Washer
(4) Shifter Collar
(5) Shifter
(6) Bi-speed
turn
Coupling
(7) Clutch
Disc
(8) Friction Plate
•
After
installing the gear shaft
with
the bearing, reinstall
the
bi-speed
turn
clutch
ass'y.
SERVICING
[2WD TYPE]
Clearance between Center
Pin
and
Pin
Support
1.
Measure the center pin
O.D.
with
an
outside micrometer.
2.
Measure the pin support I.D.
of
the
front
axle
with
a cylinder
gauge.
3.
Ifthe
clearance
exceeds
the allowable limit, replace it.
Factory
spec.
0.05
to
0.25 mm
Clearance between
0.0020
to
0.0098 in.
center pin and pin
support
Allowable
limit
0.70mm
0.0276 in.
Center pin
0.0.
Factory
spec.
24.90
to
25.00 mm
0.9803
to
0.9842 in.
Pin
support 1.0.
Factory
spec.
25.05
to
25.15 mm
0.9862
to
0.9901 in.
Clearance between Knuckle Shaft and Bushing
1.
Measure the knuckle shaft
O.D.
at several points
with
an
outside micrometer. (The knuckle shaft
tends
to
show
concentrated wear.)
2.
Similarly, measure
the
knuckle shaft bushing I.D.
with
a
cylinder gauge.
3.
Ifthe
clearance
exceeds
the allowable limit, replace.
Factory
spec.
0.040
to
0.105 mm
Clearance between
0.0016toO.0041 in.
knuckle shaft and
bushing
Allowable
limit
0.50
mm
0.0197 in.
Knuckle shaft
0.0.
Factory
spec.
24.948
to
24.980 mm
0.9822
to
0.9835 in.
Bushing 1.0.
Factory
spec.
25.020
to
25.053 mm
0.9850
to
0.9863 in.
D6-$
12
6
FRONT
AXLE
[BI-SPEED TURN TYPE]
81700'82100·82400 WSM,11771
8177F614
(1) 8i-speed Turn
Clutch
(2) FrontWheel Hub
(3) Spiral 8evel Pinion
Shaft
6
(4) Torque Wrench
(5)
Jig
(6)
Shim
(7) Gear Shaft
Bi·speed Turn Clutch Friction Torque
1.
Lift
up
the
front
of
tractor
and set the stand.
2.
Remove the
front
tires.
3.
Shift the
front
wheel drive
leverto
"ON"
position.
4.
Shift
the
bi-speed
turn
leverto
"ON"
position.
5.
Set
the
parking brake.
6.
Fully
turn
the
steering wheel
to
the
left
or
right
to
set
the
bi-
speed
turn
"ON"
position.
7.
Set
the
torque
wrench
(4)
with
the
special
jig
on
the
front
wheel hub
(2)
and set
the
special
jig
(locking bar) on
the
other
side
of
front
wheel hub.
8.
Measure
the
torque,
when
the
bi-speed
turn
clutch
is
slipped.
9.
If
the
torque
is
not
within
the
factory specifications, adjust
it
with
the
shims (6).
Dynam
ic
friction
441.3
to
490.4 N'm
torque
of
bi-speed
Factory
spec.
45
to
50
kgf'm
turn
clutch on
the
front
wheel hub
325.5
to
361.7 ft-Ibs
(Reference)
• Thickness
of
shims:
1.0
mm (0.039 in.),
1.5
mm (0.059 in.)
• When
the
dynamic friction
torque
of
bi-speed
turn
clutch
is
measured on
the
gear shaft (7), its factory specifications
as
follows.
Dyna m
ic
friction
86.40
to
96.01
N'm
torque
of
bi-speed
Reference value
8.81
to
9.79 kgf'm
turn
clutch on
the
gear shaft
63.65
to
70.81
ft-Ibs
II
NOTE
• Check
the
springs, clutch discs and
friction
plates
if
the
correct
torque
can't
be
adjusted.
Clearance between Shift Fork and Shifter Groove
1.
Place
the shift
fork
in the shifter groove and measure
the
clearance
with
a feeler gauge.
2.
Ifthe
clearance exceeds the allowable
limit,
replace.
Factory
spec.
0.1
toO.? mm
Clearance between
0.004
to
0.028 in.
shift
fork
and shifter
groove
Allowable
limit
1.0mm
0.04 in.
II
NOTE
• When measuring
the
clearance,
be
sure
to
place
the
shifter
collar between
the
shift
fork
and shifter.
D6-S13
81700'82100·82400 WSM,11771
0011P069
6
FRONT
AXLE
Free Length
of
Bi·speed Turn Spring
1.
Measure
the
free length
of
the spri ng
with
vernier
cal
ipers.
2.
Ifthe
measurement
is
less
than the allowable
limit,
replace it.
Factory
spec.
32.5
to
32.6 mm
Free length
of
bi- 1.280
to
1.283 in.
speed
tu
rn
spri
ng
(short)
Allowable
limit
28.5 mm
1.22 in.
Factory
spec.
52.0 mm
Free length
of
bi-
2.047 in.
speed
turn
spring
(long)
Allowable
limit
45.5 mm
1.791 in.
0011
P071
Working
Load
of
Bi·speed Turn Spring
1.
Put
the
spring on
the
spring tester and compress
it
to
the
specified length.
2.
Read
the
compression load on the gauge.
3.
If
the
measurement
is
less
than
the
allowable
limit,
replace it.
Load 1613 N/Setting
Factory
spec.
length 25.5 mm
164.5 kgf/25.5 mm
Working
load
of
bi-
362.7 Ibs/1.00 in.
speed
turn
spring
(short)
Load
1411
N/Setting
Allowable
limit
length 25.5 mm
143.9 kgf/25.5 mm
317.4lbs/1.00 in.
Load 86.3 N/Setting
Factory
spec.
len~th
35.0 mm
8.8 gf/35.0 mm
Working
load
of
bi- 19.4lbs/1.378 in.
srceed
turn
spring
( on
g)
Load 75.5 N/Setting
Allowable
limit
len~th
35.0 mm
7.7 R:/35.0 mm
17.0 s/1.378 in.
Clutch Disc Wear and Friction Plate Wear
1.
Measure the thickness
of
the clutch disc and
friction
plate
(steel plate)
with
vernier calipers.
2.
Ifthe
thickness
is
less
than the allowable
limit,
replace
it.
Factory
spec.
1.7t01.9mm
Thickness
of
clutch
0.067
to
0.Q75
in.
disc
1.4mm
Allowable
limit
0.055 in.
Factory
spec.
0.95
to
1.05 mm
Thickness
of
friction
0.037
to
0.075 in.
plate
0.8mm
Allowable
limit
0.0315 in.
(When reassembling)
GIl
After
keeping clutch discs
in
transmission
oil
for
several
seconds and
apply
transmission
oil
to
friction
plate,
reassembling them in order.
D6-S14
6
FRONT
AXLE
B177F615
(1)
Spiral Bevel Gear
(2)
Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft
(3)
Collar
(4)
Collar
(5)
Collar
(6)
Bi-speed Turn Clutch Assembly
(7)
Staking Nut
(8)
Front Axle
Case
(9)
Bi-speed Turn
Case
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
Turning
Force
of
Spiral
Bevel
Pinion Shaft and Backlash
between Spiral Bevel Pinion Shaft and Spiral Bevel Gear
1.
Reassemble
the spiral bevel pinion shaft (2) and bi-speed
turn
clutch assembly
(6)
and tighten the staking
nut
(7)
to
the
minimum specified torque.
II
IMPORTANT
.. Before assemble the
front
axle
case
(8) and bi-speed
turn
case
(9), noting the combination
of
the adjusting collars (3),
(5)
as
shown below.
----------
Thickness
of
collar
Collar
(3)
Collar
(5)
Combination 1
4.4mm
2.9mm
0.173 in. 0.112 in.
Combination 2
4.2
mm
2.7mm
0.165 in. 0.106 in.
Combination 3
4.6mm
3.1
mm
0.181
in.
0.122 in.
2.
Measure the
turning
torque
of
spiral bevel pinion shaft.
3.
If
the measurement
is
not
within
the factory specifications,
adjust
with
retightening the staking nut.
4.
Stick the strip
of
fuse on the spiral bevel gear (1)
with
grease.
5.
Carefully rotate the spiral bevel pinion shaft
(2)
one full turn.
6.
Remove
the fuse and measure the thickness
of
the
fuse.
7.
If
the measurement
is
not
within
the factory specification,
change the adjusting collar (3),
(4)
and
(5).
8.
Adjust
the
backlash
properly
by
repeating
the
above
procedures.
9.
After
adjusting the backlash, stake the staking
nut
(7).
0.78
to
0.98 N'm
Turning torque Factory
spec.
0.08
to
0.10
k~f.m
0.58
to
0.723 t-Ibs
29.42
to
34.32 N'm
Tightening torque
Staking nut
3.0
to
5.0
kgf'm
21.70
to
25.32 ft-Ibs
Backlash between
sRiral bevel pinion
Factory
spec.
0.1
toO.3
mm
s
aft
and spiral bevel 0.004
to
0.012 in.
gear
D6-S
15
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11771
8
HYDRAU
L1C
SYSTEM
(;]
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SERVICING
I
Distance:
"B"
I
~actory
spec.
I 19 mm
'---
..
0_.7_5_1n_.
_
8mm
0.31
in.
(9)
Bi-speed Turn Lever Grip
(10) Mid-PTO Gear ShiftLever Grip
(11)
Rear-PTO
Gear Shift Lever Grip
(12) Hi-Lo Gear Shift Lever Grip
(13) LeverGuide
(14) Bi-speed Turn Cable
(15) Cable Support
(16) Bi-speed Turn Lever
Rod
Factory
spec.
(1) Seat
(2) Lowering Speed Adjusting Knob
(3)
Seat Under Cover
(4)
Seat
Rail
(5)
Tool
Box
(6) Seat Stay
(7) Position Control Lever Grip
(8) Front Wheel Drive Lever Grip
(Reference)
I
Distance:"
A"
Seat, Seat Rail, Seat Stay and Seat Under Cover on page
8-S9
is
altered
as
explained below.
Seat, Seat Rail, Seat Stay, Seat Under Cover and Fender
(RH)
1.
Remove
the
seat
(1)
and lowering speed adjusting
knob
(2).
2.
Remove
the
tool
box
(5)
and seat under cover (3).
3.
Remove
the
position control lever
grip
(7),
front
wheel drive
lever
grip
(8), bi-speed
turn
lever
grip
(9), mid and rear-PTO
gear
shift
lever grips (10) (11) and Hi-Lo gear
shift
lever
grip
(12).
4.
Remove
the
left
and
right
hand side lever guide (13).
5.
Remove
the
seat stay
(6)
and seat rail
(4)
as
a unit.
(When reassembling)
• When connecting the bi-speed
turn
cable (14), make sure
the
distance
"A".
B177F410
D8-S1
TO
THE READER
In
this section,
the
main
additional
functions
and
altered
points
of
NEW
B1700,
B21
00
and B2400
tractor
from
previous model are explained.
As
for
the
items
which
are
not
explained in this section, refer
to
Workshop
Manual
for
B1700,
B21
00
and B2400.
II
Mechanism
Information
on
the
construction and
function
are included. This
part
should
be understood
before
proceeding
with
troubleshooting,
disassembling and
servicing.
II
Servicing
Under
the
heading
"General"
section comes general precautions, check and
maintenance
and special
tools.
Other
section,
there
are
troubleshooting,
servicing
specification
lists,
checking
and
adjusting,
disassembling
and
assembling,
and
servicing
which
cover
procedures,
precautions,
factory
specifications and
allowable
limits.
All
information,
illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are
based on
the
latest
production
information
available
at
the
time
of
publication.
The
right
is
reserved
to
make changes in all
information
at
any
time
without
notice.
NOTE: The same model names are
used
for
the
new
and
the
previous tractor.
Therefore,
different
serial numbers are used
to
distinguish
between
the
new
and
the
previous models.
* Serial
number
on
the
new
B1700,
B21
00
and B2400
tractor
MODEL Serial
number
MODEL Serial
number
B1700E above 10141 B2100HE above 30001
B1700D above 50443 B2100HD
above 72036
B1700HE above 30001 B2400E above 10001
B1700HD above71831 B2400D
above 50005
B2100E
above 10001 B2400HE
above 30155
B2100D
above 50403 B2400HD
above 72546
June '96
© KUBOTA Corporation 1996
G
GENERAL
[!1
GENERAL
[1] MAINTENANCE
CHECK
LIST
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM, 11772
Indication on hour meter
After
Check
point
(Change or check every interval shown below) purchase
Reference
No.
page
1 2
50
100 150
200
250
300 350
400
450
500 550
600
650 700
750
800
year years
1
HST
pedal return spring
0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
EG-1
[2]
CHECK
AND
MAINTENANCE
A
CAUTION
..
Be
sure
to
check and service the tractor on a
flat
place
with
engine shut
off,
the parking brake on and
chock
the
wheels.
(1) Check Points
of
Every 100 Hours
(1) Return Spring
(for
Forward
Adjustment)
(2) Return Spring
(for
Reverse
Adjustment)
(3)
Adjustment
Nut
(4) Lock
Nut
4
Checking
HST
Pedal
Performance
A
WARNING
To
avoid personal
injury:
.. Do
not
operate
if
tractor moves on level ground
with
foot
off
HST
pedal.
1.
Set
the engine
speed
to
1500
rpm.
2.
Shift the range gear shift lever
to
the high position.
3.
Move the
HST
pedal from the forward
to
the neutral position
to
make
sure
that
the tractor
comes
to
a complete stop, and
check the
same
for
the movement from the rearward
to
the
neutral position.
4.
If
HST
pedal
is
too
slow in returning
to
neutral position,
adjust the
HST
pedal spring compression.
-----
Length (A)
Length
(B)
Normal compression
50
mm (2.0 in.)
50
mm
(2.0 in.)
Max. com pression
42
mm (1.7 in.)
42 mm (1.7 in.)
II
IMPORTANT
.. Do
not
compress
the
return
spring
shorter
than
Max.
compression length
42
mm (1.7 in.).
EG-1
B1700·B21 00·B2400
WSM,
11772
[3] SPECIAL TOOLS
(1) Special Tools
for
Tractor
PS
YIl"
Unit:
mm
(in.)
G
GENERAL
PSAdaptor
Application:
Use
for
checking
the
power
steering
relief pressure.
C2
B193FG12
~
[::!
CJ
(<i>r
'\610.24)
l . ,
'"
~~
",N
...
!1
m
'"
.
~.
--
"'~
<>,.,,<:J
~
sB
--0-1
LJ
~
N'"
1:\
--
I
tciC'i
"';':
in
~
/
f-
"''''
-
Q)~
.-£
"
~
3311.30)
16
45(1.77)
(0.63)
61(2.40)
B193FG26
310.12)
Unit:
mm (in.)
Pin
6(0.24)dia. ,15(0.59)1ength
12
10.47) 610.24)
PS
Lock
Nut
Wrench
Application:
Use
for
tighten
the
lock
nut
for
plug.
C5
.C20
Unit:
mm
(in.)
12
10.47)
5(0.20)
510.20)
EG-2
PS
Plug Wrench
Application:
Use
for
tighten
the
plug
for
ball
nut
assembling.
1
ENGINE
ENGINE
SERVICING
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11772
Suction Pipe, Delivery Pipe and Power Steering Pipes
and Others
1.
Remove the
foot
accelerator rod (1).
2.
Remove the
power
steering delivery pipe (2).
3.
Remove the
power
steering return pipe (3).
(HST
Type)
4.
Loosen
the
joint
bolt
of
delivery
pipe on
the
hydraulic
cylinder and disconnect the flare
nut
of
3-point hitch delivery
pipe (4).
5.
Remove
the
fuel
filter
bracket
(8).
6.
Loosen
the
cramp
of
suction hose
(5)
and remove
the
suction
hose
from
the
hydraulic pump
(6).
7.
Remove
the
shutter plate (7).
(When reassembling)
Power steering delivery
34.0
to
39.0 N'm
3.5
to
4.0 kgf'm
pipe
25.0
to
28.8 ft-Ibs
Flare
nut
29.4
to
39.2 N'm
(P.S.
return pipe and
3-
3.0
to
4.0
kgf·m
point hitch delivery pipe) 21.7
to
28.9 ft-Ibs
Tightening torque
34.3
to
44.1
N'm
Joint bolt
3.5to4.5kgf·m
25.3
to
32.5
ft-Ibs
Fuel
filter
bracket
17.7
to
20.6 N'm
mounting screw
1.8
to
2.1
kgf·m
13.0
to
15.2
ft-Ibs
(1) Foot Accelerator
Rod
(2)
Power Streering Delivery
Pipe
(3)
Power StreeringReturn
Pipe
(4)
3-Point Hitch Delivery
Pipe
E1-S
1
(5)
Suction
Hose
(6)
Hydraulic Pump
(7)
Shutter Plate
(8)
Fuel
Filter 8racket
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11772
CLUTCH
SERVICING
2
CLUTCH
Suction Pipe, Delivery Pipe and Power Steering Pipes
and Others
1.
Remove
the
foot
accelerator rod (1).
2.
Remove
the
power steering delivery pipe (2).
3.
Remove the power steeri ng return
pi
pe
(3).
(HST
type)
4.
Disconnect
the
flare
nut
of
3-point hitch
delivery
pipe
(4)
from
flow
priority
valve and loosen
the
joint
bolt
on
the
hydraulic cylinder. .
5.
Remove the fuel
filter
bracket
(8)
with
fuel
filter.
6.
Loosen the clamps
of
suction
hose
(5)
and remove
the
suction
hose
from
the
hydraulic pump
(6).
7.
Remove
the
shutter plate (7).
(When reassembling)
P?wer steering delivery
34.0
to
39.0 N'm
3.5
to
4.0 kgf'm
pipe
25.0
to
28.8 ft-Ibs
Flare nut
29.4
to
39.2 N'm
(P.S.
return pipe and
3-
3.0
to
4.0 kgf'm
point
hitch delivery pipe)
21.7
to
28.9 ft-Ibs
Tightening
torque
58.8
to
78.5 N'm
Joint
bolt
6.0
to
8.0
kgf'm
43.4
to
57.9 ft-Ibs
Fuel
filter
bracket
17.7
to
20.6 N'm
mounting screw
1.8to
2.1
kgf'm
13.0
to
15.2 ft-Ibs
(1) Foot Accelerator
Rod
(2) Power Steering Delivery Pipe
(3) Power Steering Return Pipe
(4) 3-Point Hitch Delivery Pipe
E2-S
1
(5)
Suction
Hose
(6)
Hydraulic Pump
(7)
Sh
utte
r PIate
(8)
Fuel
Filter Bracket
3
TRANSMISSION
~
TRANSMISSION
MECHANISM
(1) Control Linkage
B193F301
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11772
o
10
(1) Trunnion Control Lever
Assembly
(2) Neutral Adjuster
(3) Speed Control
Rod
(4) Speed Set Lever
(5) Damper
(6) Speed Control Pedal
(HST
Pedal)
(7) Trunnion
Arm
(8)
Trunnion Lever
(9) Roller
(10)
HST
Pedal Spring Assembly
The speed control pedal
(6)
and
the
trunnion
shaft
of
variable swashplate are
linked
with
the
speed
control
rod
(3)
and
the
trunnion
control
lever
assembly (1).
As
the
front
footrest
of
the
pedal
is
depressed,
the
swashplate
rotates
and
forward
travelling
speed increases. Depressing
the
rear
footrest increases reverse speed.
The
roller
(9)
on
the
trunnion
lever
(8)
holded
with
spring seats
the
detent
of
the
trunnion
arm (7)
so
that
the
trunnion
lever returns
to
neutral. Then,
the
swashplate
is
returned
to
neutral
with
the
trunnion
control lever assembly, by means
of
HST
pedal spring
assembly
(10),
when
the
pedal
is
released. The
damper
(5)
connected
to
the
speed
control
pedal
restricts
the
movement
of
the
linkage
to
prevent
abrupt
operation
or
reversing.
The speed set lever
(4)
linked
to
the
speed control
pedal enables the linkage
not
to
return
to
neutral
and
to
keep a certain forward speed
while
the
speed
control pedal
is
released.
E3-M1
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11772
SERVICING
CHECKING
AND
ADJUSTING
3
TRANSMISSION
8193P014
(1) 8rake
Rod
(RH)
(2)
HST
Pedal
Damper
(3) Neutral Adjuster
(4) Return Spring
(for
forward
adjustment)
(5) Return Spring
(for
reverse adjustment)
(6) Adjusting
Nut
(7) Adjusting
Nut
(8) Lock
Nut
(9) Lock
Nut
(10) Lock
Nut
(11) Neurtal Position
Adjusting
Nut
(12)
Rod
(13) Stay
Neutral
1.
Disengage the
front
wheel
drive
lever. (Drive
only
rear
wheels.)
2.
Lift
the
rear
of
the
tractor
so
that
the
rear wheels are
off
the
ground and run the engine
at
low
idling
and drive
only
rear
wheels.
3.
Depress
the
one end
of
speed control pedal and release, and
do
the
same
at
the other end.
4.
If
the
rear wheels
do
not
stop
turning,
adjust
as
following
procedure.
Adjusting Neutral
1.
Disconnect the brake rod
RH
(1).
2.
Loosen
the
lock
nut
(8)
(9)
and adjusting
nut
(6) (7)
until
springs
(4)
(5)
are freely.
3.
Loosen
the
lock
nut
(10) and neutral position adjusting
nut
(11) until washer welded on
the
rod (12) comes
off
from
stay
(13).
4.
Remove
the
HST
pedal damper (2).
5.
Loosen
the
neutral adjuster
(3)
setting screw.
(When rear wheels tend
to
turn
forward)
1.
Rotate
the
neutral adjusting lever clockwise
so
that
the
rear
wheels
turn
reverse.
2.
Then
rotate
it
counterclockwise
until
wheels
stop
completely.
(When rear wheels tend
to
turn
reverse)
1.
Rotate
the
neutral adjusting lever counterclockwise
so
that
the
rear wheels
turn
forward.
2.
Then rotate
it
clockwise until wheels stop completely.
(After
adjusting neutral)
1.
Make sure the
HST
control pedal (d)
is
at
the neutral position.
(Let the pedal
go
from
the
forward
to
the
neutral position,
as
well
as
from
the rearward
to
the
neutral position. Make sure
the pedal returns
to
just the
same
neutral position.)
2.
Turn
the
neutral position adjusting
nut
(11)
to
move
the
rod
(12) until there
is
a clearance
"A"
0 mm
(0
in.) between
the
welded washer and the stay (13). (Set in
position
with
a
slight contact.)
Now
turn
this
nut
counterclockwise by
half
a
turn.
Now
lock
the
nut
(10).
(Be
careful
not
overtighten
the
nut
(11). Otherwise the
HST
pedal may
get
stuck.)
3.
Finally lock the double
nut
(8),
(9)
so
that
the
spring (4), (5),
should
be
49
to
51
mm (1.93
to
2.01
in.)
forward
and
49
to
51
mm (1.93
to
2.01
in.) rearward in
length
Band
C.
----
Length
(B)
Length
(C)
Normal compression
50
mm (2.0 in.)
50
mm (2.0 in.)
Max. compression
42
mm (1.7 in.)
42
mm (1.7 in.)
Neutral adjuster setting
39.2
to
44.1
N'm
Tightening
torque
4.0
to
4.5
kgf'm
screw
28.9
to
32.5 ft-Ibs
E3-S1
3
TRANSMISSION
B177F350
(1)
Return Spring
(for
(A)
Normal Setting
forward
adjustment)
Position
(2)
Return Spring
(for
(B)
Slower Setting
reverse adjustment)
Position
(3)
Adjusting
Nut
(C)
Spring Length
(4)
Lock
Nut
(D)
Spring Length
(5)
Damper
(6)
Nut
for
Fixing
the
damper
(7)
Nut
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11772
HST
Pedal Performance
1.
Set
the
engine speed
to
1500
rpm.
2.
Shift the range gear shift lever
to
Hi
position.
3.
Move
the
HST
pedal from the
forward
to
the
neutral position
to
make
sure
that
the
tractor
comes
to
a
complete
stop.
Check
the
same
for
the
movement
from
the
rearward
to
the
neutral position.
4.
If
the
tractor
fails
to
stop,
take
the
following
steps
to
readjust the
HST
pedal spring (1),
(2).
To
make the
HST
pedal return back more slowly, readjust
the
damper in the procedure below.
(When adjusting speed
HST
pedal damper)
~
The damper
is
controls
HST
pedal returning speed. Move
the
damper
(5)
from (A) towards
(B)
if
slower stopping
is
needed.
1.
Loosen
the
nut
(6).
2.
Move
the
damper
(5)
from (A) towards
(B).
3.
Tighten the
nut
(6).
III IMPORTANT
Ii
Do
not
loosen
the
nut
(7)
when
moving damper position.
•
If
the
pedal returns
to
neutral
too
fast
when
the
operator
removes his
foot,
turf
damage and /
or
premature
tire
wear
may occur.
(When adjusting
HST
pedal returning spring)
A WARNING
To
avoid personal
injury:
• Do
not
operate
if
tractor
moves on level ground
with
foot
off
Speed Control Pedal.
• The return spring
can
adjust returning force
of
HST
pedal.
1.
If
HST
pedal
is
too
slow in returning
to
neutral position
when
removing the
foot
form
HST
pedal.
----
Length
(C)
Length
(D)
Normal compression
50
mm
(2.0 in.)
50
mm (2.0 in.)
Max. compression
42
mm
(1.7 in.)
42
mm
(1.7 in.)
III IMPORTANT
• Do
not
compress
the
Return Spring
shorter
than
Max.
compression length.
E3-S2
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11772
3
TRANSMISSION
Stay
mounting
screw
77.4to90.2
N'm
7.9to9.2
kgf'm
(M12)
57.1
to
66.5 ft-Ibs
Tightening
torque
Arm
mounting
bolt
and
23.5
to
29.8 N'm
nut
(M8)
2.4
to
2.8 kgf·m
17.3
to
20.5 ft-Ibs
23.5
to
29.8 N'm
Damper adjusting
nut
2.4
to
2.8
kgf'm
17.3
to
20.5 ft-Ibs
B177F324
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING
[1]
SEPARATING
CENTER
FRAME
AND
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
HST
Pedal
(HST
Type)
1.
Disconnect
the
right
hand side brake rod (1).
2.
Remove
the
damper (2).
3.
Remove
the
HST
pedal spring assembly (3).
4. Tap
out
the
spring pin (4) and remove
the
spring lock pin (5),
then
draw
out
the
HST
pedal (6).
(When reassembling)
• Tap in
the
spring pin (4)
as
shown in
the
figure.
III
NOTE
..
After
reassembling
the
HST
pedal
spring
assembly,
must
adjust
the
spring force and check
the
pedal performace (See
page
3-S7,
S8)
(1) Brake
Rod
(2) Damper
(3)
HST
Pedal Spring
assembly
[A] Outside
[B]
Inside
(4) Spring
Pin
(5) Spring Lock
Pin
(6)
HST
Pedal
E3-S3
7
STEERING
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11772
STEERING
MECHANISM
[1]
HYDRAULIC
CIRCUIT
FOR
POWER
STEERING
SYSTEM
11
(A)
To Oil Cooler
(HST
Type
Only)
(B)
To Transmission
Case
(Manual
Transmission
Type Only)
(C)
To
Control
Valve
~
~
(1
)
Sector Gear Shaft
(2)
Balls
(3)
Ball
Nut
(4)
Worm
Shaft
(5)
Control Valve
(6)
Relief Valve
(7)
Steering
Wheel
4
(8)
Pump
(9)
Transmission
Case
(10)
Flow
Priority
Valve
(11)
Hydraulic Block Type
Outlet
©
[
17£/min
]
4.4 U.S.GPM
3.7Imp.GPM
®
B193F701
B193P045
(12) Stub
Shaft
(Spool) (13) Sleeve
All
models are
available
to
be
equipped
with
integral
type
power
steeri ng
that
of
rotary
type
control valve
with
torsion bar. (Note
that
this torsion
bar doubles
as
a centering spring)
Flow
priority
valve (10) divides
the
oil
into
two
directions. One
is
the
control
flow
to
power steering
(constantly
5 Dlmin., 1.3 U.S.GPM,
1.1
Imp.GPM
at
any engine speed). And the other
is
excessive
flow
to
control valve.
The
mechanical gear section show in
the
next page
operates
in
the
same
way
as
ordinary
manual
steering system.
The
input
shaft (stub shaft) (12) and
the
worm
shaft (4), which
can
separate from each
other,
are
jointed
together
via a torsion bar (21). One end
of
the
torsion bar
is
fixed by a pin (22)
with
the
stub
shaft
(12), where
as
the
other
end
is
press
fitted
to
the
end
of
the
worm
shaft (4).
The
control valve (5) consists
of
a sleeve (13) and a
spool
(12). The sleeve
is
coupled by a pin (19)
to
the
worm
shaft (4), and the spool
is
provided on the stub
shaft
(12).
When a
turning
torque
in either direction
is
given
to
the stub shaft (12),
the
counterforce
of
the tires
is
produced
from
the
sector gear shaft (1)
through
the
drag link, pitman arm and
other
parts.
The
torsion
bar
(21) then gets under torsional force. In this way,
the
positional relation between
the
sleeve (13) and
spool
(12) changes, thereby switching
the
direction
ofthe
oil
flowing
into
the
right
and
left
cylinders.
E7-M1
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11772
[2] POWER STEERING BODY
7
STEERING
B193F702
(1) Sector Gear
Shaft
(2) Balls
(3) Ball
Nut
(4)
Worm
Shaft
(6) Relief Valve
(12) Stub
Shaft
(13) Sleeve
(14) GearCase
(15)
a-Ring
(16) Seal Ring
(17) Plug
(18) Lock
Nut
(19)
Pin
(20) Valve Housing
(21) Torsion Bar
(22)
Pin
(23) Oil
Seal
E7-M2
(24) Roller Bearings
(25)
Press
Fitted Ring
(26)
Th
rust
Races
(27) Thrust Bearings
(28)
Adjusting
Screw
for
Play
7
STEERING
[3] OIL FLOW
11/
Neutral Position
B1700'B2100'B2400 WSM, 11772
c:::::=J
Low
Pressure
B193F703
(A) From Pump (Through Flow
Priority Valve)
(B)
To
HST
Unit
(HST
Type)
or
Transmission
Case
(Manual
Transmission Type)
(1) Sector Gear Shaft
(2)
Ball
Nut
(3)
Worm
Shaft
(4)
Torsion Bar
(5)
Sleeve
(6)
Valve Housing
(7)
Stub Shaft (Spool)
When
the
steering wheel
is
not
turned, the valve
is
placed in
the
neutral position by
the
torsion bar
(4).
Therefore,
there
is
no
difference
between
11/
Left Turning
High
Pressure
c:::::=J
Low
Pressure
B193F704
1.
When
the
steering
wheel
is
turned
counterclockwise,
the
stub shaft (7) starts
turning,
but
the
sector
gear
shaft
(1), ball
nut
(2) and
worm
shaft (3) remain motionless under the load
of
the
ti
res.
This
means
that
the
torsion
bar (4) gets
under
torsional force and
that
stub
shaft
(7) and
the
worm
shaft
(3)
start
turning
in
a
relative
displacement,
the
spool
part
of
the
stub shaft
(7)
turns counterclockwise
with
respect
to
the sleeve
(5).
pressures on
the
right
and
left
cylinder
chambers.
And the ball
nut
(2)
and sector gear shaft (1)
do
not
move.
So,
the
front
wheels keep
the
direction.
(1)
Sector Gear Shaft
(2)
Ball
Nut
(3)
Worm
Shaft
(4)
Torsion Bar
(5)
Sleeve
(6)
Valve Housing
(7)
Stub Shaft (Spool)
(8)
Relief Valve
(A)
Chamber
"A"
(B)
Chamber
"B"
(C)
From Pump
(D)
To
HST
Unit
or
Transmission
Case
(a)
Port"
a"
(b)
Port
"b"
2.
At
this time,
the
oil
passage
from
pump
to
port
"b"
and oil passage
from
port
"a"
to
are closed.
Therefore,
the
pressure-fed oil
from
pump
flows
to
the chamber
"A"
through
port
"a".
Thus,
the
ball
nut
(piston)
(2)
is
pushed, and
the
sector gear
shaft
(1)
is
rotated in
the
direction
of
the
arrow.
E7-M3
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11772
IlII
Right Turning
I I
High
Pressure
c=J
Low
Pressure
B193F705
1.
When the steering wheel
is
turned clockwise, the
stub shaft
(7) starts
turning,
but
the sector gear
shaft
(1), ball
nut
(2) and worm shaft (3) remain
motionless under
the
load
of
the tires.
This
means
that
the
torsion bar (4) gets under torsional force
and
that
stub shaft (7) and
the
worm shaft (3) start
turning
in a relative displacement, the spool part
of
the
stub shaft (7) turns clockwise
with
respect
to
the
sleeve (5).
IlII
Manual Operation
(When Engine Stops
or
Hydraulic Circuit Troubles)
Even
when
the
engine stops or hydraulic
circuit
malfunctions thus leading
to
hydraulic
operation
stop,
manual
operation
is
possible.
However,
naturally, steering wheel requires a larger operating
power.
If
the
steering
wheel
is
turned
when
hydraulic
7
STEERING
(1)
Sector Gear Shaft
(2)
Ball
Nut
(3)
Worm
Shaft
8 (4)
Torsion Bar
(5)
Sleeve
(6)
Valve Housing
(7)
Stub Shaft
(8)
Relief Valve
(A)
Chamber
"A"
(B)
Chamber
"B"
(a)
Port"
a"
(b)
Port
"b"
2.
At
this time, the oil
passage
from pump
to
port
"a"
and oil
passage
from
port
"b"
to
are closed.
Therefore, the pressure-fed oil from pump
flows
to
the chamber
"B"
through
port
"b".
Thus,
the
ball
nut
(piston) (2)
is
pushed, and the sector gear
shaft
(1)
is
rotated in the direction
of
the arrow.
circuit
ceases
to
operate, the
worm
shaft (3) which
is
connected
with
stub shaft (7) moves
slightly
by
steering force, then the worm shaft
(3) and ball
nut
(2) have
same
relationship
with
the
manual steering
gear.
E7-M4
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11772
SERVICING
TROUBLESHOOTING
7
STEERING
Symptom
Probable
Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Excessive Steering
• Backlash between sector gear shaft and ball
Adjust
E7-S9
Wheel Play
nut
too
large
•
Steering linkage
worn
Replace
-
..
Sector gear shaft
worn
Replace
E7-SS
Tractor Pulls
to
•
Tire pressure uneven Adjust
G-36
Right
or
Left
•
Steering wheel play
too
small Adjust
E7-S9
•
Improper toe-in adjustment Adjust
6-S4
Front Wheels
•
Steering linkage
worn
Replace
-
Vibration
•
Impropertoe-in adjustment Adjust
6-S4
Hard Steering
•
Transmission
fluid
improper
or
insufficient Change
G-8
•
Oil leak
from
pipe
joint
Retighten
-
•
Hydraulic pump malfunctioning Replace
E8-S6
•
Relief valve malfunctioning Replace
E7-S7
•
Valve housing and sleeve malfunctioning Replace
E7-S6
•
Seals
in
the
steering gear box damaged Replace
-
•
Backlash between sector gear shaft and ball Adjust
E7-S9
nuttoosmall
•
Air
in
the
hydraulic pipes
Air
vent
-
•
Low operating pressure Refer
to
next item
-
•
Flow
priority
valve malfunctioning Replace
E8-S4
Low Operating
•
Hydraulic pump malfunctioning Replace
E8-S6
Pressure
•
Improper relief valve adjustment Adjust
E7-S4,
S9
•
Relief valve malfunctioning
Replace
E7-S9
ED
Seals
in
the
steering gear box damaged
Replace
-
•
Ball
nut
malfunctioning
Replace ball
nut
-
assembly
• Oil leak
from
pipe
or
pipe broken
Replace
-
Steering Wheel
•
Valve housing and sleeve jammed
Repair
or
Replace
E7-S8,
S
10
Does
Not
Return
to
•
Valve housing oil
seal
damaged
Replace
-
Neutral Position
Steering Force
..
Insufficient oil
Replenish
G-8
Fluctuates
•
Insufficient bleeding
Bleed
-
..
Control valve malfunctioning
Replace
E7-S8
Noise
..
Insufficient oil
Replenish
G-8
•
Air
sucked in pump
from
suction circuit
Repair
-
CD
Pipe deformed
Replace
-
E7-S1
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM, 11772
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torques
of
screws and nuts on the table
below
are especially specified.
(For general
use
screws and nuts:
See
page
G-8)
7
STEERING
Item
N'm
kgf'm
ft·lbs
Drag
link
end slotted
nut
17.7
to
34.3
1.8t03.5
13.0
to
25.3
Pitman arm
mounting
nut
98.0
to
118.0
10.0to
12.0
72.3
to
86.8
Power steering assembly
mounting
screw 77.5
to
90.1
7.9t09.2
57.2
to
66.5
Power steering delivery pipe
34.0
to
39.0 3.5
to
4.0
25.3
to
28.9
Power steering return pipe
29.4
to
39.2
3.0
to
4.0
21.7
to
28.9
Steering wheel
mounting
nut
29.4to
49.0
3.0
to
5.0
21.7t036.2
Valve housing
mounting
hex head screw
39.2
to
49.0 4.Oto 5.0
28.9
to
36.2
Side cover
mounting
screw
19.6
to
29.4
2.0
to
3.0
14.5
to
21.7
Sector gear shaft adjust screw lock
nut
19.6
to
29.4 2.0
to
3.0
14.5
to
21.7
Sector gear shaft adjust screw cap
nut
19.6t029.4
2.0
to
3.0
14.5
to
21.7
Relief pressure adjusting screw lock
nut
49.1
to
78.5
5.0
to
8.0
36.2to
57.8
Plug
8.8to
10.8
0.9
to
1.1
6.5to
8.0
Plug lock
nut
88.3
to
107.9
9.Q
to
11.0
65.1
to
79.6
E7-S3
7
STEERING
81700·82100·82400 WSM, 11772
CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING
AND
SERVICING
CHECKING
(2) Pressure Gauge
II
IMPORTANT
•
Use
only the transmission
fluid
(See
page
G-B),
in no
case
use
mixture
of
oils
of
different
brands.
• Do
not
disassemble
the
hydraulic pump and
power
steering needlessly.
•
After
installing
or
reassembling the
power
steering hydraulic components,
be
sure
to
bleed air.
Relief Valve Setting Pressure
1.
Open the bonnet and remove the right hand side cover.
2.
Remove
the outside plug
of
flow
priority
valve and
then
install the
PS
adaptor (Refer
to
EG-2)
(1)
to
flow
priority valve
and connect the cable and pressure gauge
(2)
to
PS
adaptor.
3.
Start the engine.
After
warming up, set the engine
speed
at
approx.
2600
rpm.
4.
Fully turn the steering wheel
to
the
left
or
right
end
to
read
the relief pressure.
After
reading, stop the engine.
5.
If
the pressure
is
not
factory specification, check the pump
delivery line and adjust
the
relief
valve setting pressure
(Refer
to
E7-S7).
Power steering relief valve
12.2
to
12.7
MPa
Factory
spec.
125
to
130 kgf/cm
2
setting pressure
1778
to
1849
psi
[1] SEPARATING POWER
STEERING
BODY
17.7to34.3
N'm
Slotted
nut
1.8
to
3.5
kgf'm
13.0
to
25.3 ft-Ibs
Tightening torque
Pitman arm mounting
98.0
to
118.0
N·m
10.0
to
12.0 kgf'm
nut
72.3
to
86.8 ft-Ibs
Drag Link and Pitman Arm
1.
Remove
the slotted
nut
and disconnect the drag
link
(2)
from
the pitman arm
(1).
2.
Remove
the
pitman
arm
mounting
nut
and remove
the
pitman arm
with
pitman arm puller (Code
No.
07909-39011).
(When reassembling)
II
IMPORTANT
•
After
tightening the slotted
nut
to
the
specified
torque,
install the cotter pin
as
shown in the figure.
• Install the pitman arm
to
the sector gear shaft
so
that
their
marks align.
(2)
Drag Link
(1) Pitman Arm
030F129
E7-S4
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11772
Power Steering Delivery Pipe
Power Steering Return Pipe
Power Steering Assembly
7
STEERING
Power Steering Assembly
1.
Remove
the power steering delivery pipe (1) and return pipe
(2).
2. Disconnect the
speed
set
rod
(HST
type) and parking brake
rod.
3.
Remove
the
power steering assembly (3)
from
the
center
frame.
(When reassembling)
P~wer
steering delivery
34.0
to
39.0 N'm
3.5
to
4.0
kgf'm
pipe
25.3
to
28.9 ft-Ibs
P~wer
steering return
29.4
to
39.2 N'm
Tightening
torque
3.0
to
4.0
kgf'm
pipe
21.7
to
28.9 ft-Ibs
Power steering
assem
bly
77.5
to
90.1
N'm
7.9to9.2
kgf'm
mounting screw
57.2
to
66.5 ft-Ibs
[2] POWER
STEERING
BODY
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING
II
NOTE
II
Carefully clean up the disassembled parts and sub-assemblies
with
fresh oil.
Blow
them
dry
with
compressed
air
.
.. Replace all
the
disassembled sealing parts (O-ring, U-seal, oil seal, slipper seal, etc.)
with
new
ones.
• Check all the cleaned-up parts
for
scratches, excessive wear, cracks and other defects.
Place
them in order
on a clean workbench.
Be
also careful
to
keep
off
dust and dirt.
Side Cover and Sedor Gear Shaft
1.
Remove
the
cap
nut
(2) and loosen the lock
nut
(3).
2.
Remove
the side cover mounting
screws.
3.
Tap
out
the sector gear shaft (4) and side cover (1)
as
a
unit
toward
the
side cover.
(When reassembling)
ED
Turn the worm shaft
so
that
the ball
nut
is
centered in its
travel. Then, install the sector gear shaft
so
that
the
center
of
its teeth engages the center teeth
of
the ball nut.
19.6to29.4N·m
Cap
nut
2.0
to
3.0
kgf'm
14.5
to
21.7 ft-Ibs
19.6
to
29.4 N'm
Tightening
torque
Lock
nut
2.0
to
3.0
kgf'm
14.5
to
21.7 ft-Ibs
Side
cover mounting
19.6
to
29.4 N'm
2.0
to
3.0
kgf·m
screw
14.5
to
21.7 ft-Ibs
(3)
Lock Nut
(4)
Sector Gear Shaft
E7-SS
7
STEERING
B
1700·B21
00·B2400 WSM, 11772
Valve Assembly and Ball NutAssembly
1.
Remove
the
valve housing mounting hex. head screws.
2.
Draw
out
the valve assembly and ball
nut
assembly
as
a unit.
(When reassembling)
Valve housing mounting
39.2
to
49.0 N'm
Tightening torque 4.0
to
5.0
kgf'm
hex. head screw
28.9
to
36.2 ft-Ibs
88.3
to
107.9 N'm
Lock
nut
9.0
to
11.0
k~f.m
65.1
to
79.6
-Ibs
Tightening torque
8.8
to
10.8 N'm
Plug
0.9
to
1.1
kgf'm
6.5
to
8.0 ft-Ibs
Ball
Nut
Assembly
1.
Remove
the
lock
nut
(2).
2.
Remove
the
plug (3).
3.
Pull
out
the ball
nut
assembly
(4)
with
sleeve (5) and stub
shaft (6) from valve housing (1).
(When reassembling)
.. When
tighten
the
lock
nut
and plug,
use
the
PS
lock
nut
wrench and
PS
pi
ug
wrench (Refer
to
G-34)
.
..
Be
sure
to
tighten
the
plug
to
specified torque.
If
the
plug
is
tightened
to
excessive
torque,
it
may cause
damage
to
the thrust
races
and thrust bearings.
B193P039
(1) Valve Housing
(2)
Lock
Nut
(3)
Plug
E7-S6
(4)
Ball Nut Assembly
(5)
Sleeve
(6)
Stub Shaft
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11772
7
STEERING
B193F707
(1)
Valve Housing
(2)
Relief Valve Poppet
(3)
Relief Spring
(4) O-ring
(5) Adjusting Screw
(6)
Lock
Nut
Disassembling Valve Housing
III IMPORTANT
.. Do
not
disassemble the relief valve needlessly, since
it
has
been factory-adjusted.
• If
the
relief valve
is
disassembled, replace
the
adjusting
screw
with
new
one, and
after
reassembly,
be
sure
to
adjust
the
setting pressure, then stake the adjusting screw
with
a
punch.
Relief
rcressure
adjusting
49.1
to
78.5 N'm
Tightening torque
5.0
to
8.0
kgf'm
screw ock
nut
36.2
to
57.8 ft-Ibs
Seal
Ring on Ball
Nut
1.
Cut
the
seal
ring
with
a knife and remove it.
2.
Remove
the
O-ring inside
the
seal
ring.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease
to
the
ring groove.
• Replace
the
seal
rings
with
new
ones.
• Stretch the
seal
ring by hand, install
it
on
the
ball nut, and
press
it
so
that
it
is
restored
to
its original form.
(1)
Ball Nut
Sector Gear Shaft
1.
Turn
the
adjusting screw (1)
to
counterclockwise
then
separate the side cover
(3)
and sector gear shaft
(2).
(1) Adjusting Screw
(2) Sector Gear Shaft
(3)
Side
Cover
Adjuster
of
Sector Gear Shaft
1.
Remove the stake and adjuster
(2).
(1)
Adjusting Screw
(2) Adjuster
(3)
Sector Gear Shaft
B193F708
(When reassembling)
CD
Replace
the
adjuster
with
new
one.
E7-S7
7
STEERING
SERVICING
B193P041
B193P042
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM, 11772
Clearance Between Steering Gear Box and Ball
Nut
1.
Measure
the
steering gear box cylinder
I.D.
with
a cylinder
gauge.
2.
Measure the ball
nut
a.D.
with
an outside micrometer, and
calculate this clearance.
3.
If
the clearance exceeds
the
allowable
limit,
replace
the
steering gear box
or
ball
nut
assembly.
Factory spec.
0.035
to
0.079 mm
Clearance
between
0.001
to
0.00311 in.
steering gear box and
ball
nut
Allowable
limit
0.15mm
0.0059 in.
Gear box bore I.D.
Factory spec.
56.005
to
56.030 mm
2.2049
to
2.20591 in.
Ball
nuta.D.
Factory
spec.
55.951
to
55.970 mm
2.2080
to
2.20354 in.
Clearance Between Valve Housing and Sleeve
1.
Measure the valve housing
I.D.
with
a cylinder gauge and
the
sleeve a.D.
with
an outside micrometer, and calculate this
clearance.
2.
Ifthe
clearance exceeds the allowable
limit,
replace
the
valve
housing
or
sleeve assembly.
II1II
IMPORTANT
• Check
to
see
if
the
slipper
seals
of
sleeve
do
dot
have
excessive wear.
Factory spec.
0.17
to
0.28 mm
Clearance between
0.0067
to
0.0110 in.
valve housing and
sleeve
Allowable
limit
0.40 mm
0.0157 in.
Sleeve
a.D.
Factory
spec.
35.77
to
35.83 mm
1.4083
to
1.4106 in.
Valve housing I.D. Factory spec.
36.00
to
36.05 mm
1.4173to
1.4193 in.
Axial Play
of
Ball
Nut
Assembly
1. Secure
the
ball
nut
assembly in a vise.
2. Set a dial indicator
with
its
finger
on
the
worm
shaft
of
the
ball
nut
assembly.
3. Move
the
worm
shaft axially and measure
the
play.
4.
If
the
play exceeds
the
allowable
limit,
replace
the
ball
nut
assembly.
Factory spec.
OtoO.02mm
Axial play
of
ball
nut
o
to
0.00079 in.
assembly
0.04mm
Allowable
limit
0.00157 in.
E7-S8
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11772
7
STEERING
Backlash between Sector Gear Shaft and Ball Nut
1.
Attach
the
pitman arm having no play.
2.
Set
a dial indicator
with
its
finger
on the pitman arm.
3. Move
the
pitman arm lightly, and measure
the
deflection.
4.
If
the
measurement
is
not
within
the factory specification,
adjust
the
backlash
with
the
adjusting screw.
Backlash between sector
0.30 mm
gear shaft and ball
nut
Factory spec.
Less
than
0.01B in.
E7-S9
8 HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11772
(:] HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
MECHANISM
[1] HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
l1li
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
4
(1)
Position Control Valve
(2)
Rear
Hydraulic
Outlet
(3)
Power Steering
(4)
Flow Priority Valve
(5)
Oil Filter
(6)
Hydraulic Block Type
Outlet
(7)
Hydraulic Pump
(8)
Hydraulic Cylinder
(9)
Lowering Speed Adjusting
Valve
(10)
Relief Valve
B177F851
4
:-----·---r
I
:~
, '
I _
l _
---y
,
I
I
I
,
I
!1
-~
--
....
~~
Oil Flow in Neutral
State
B177F852
E8-M1
B1700-B2100-B2400 WSM,11772 8 HYDRAU
Lie
SYSTEM
III HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
(1) Position Control Valve
(2) Oil Filter
(3) Hydrostatic Transmission
(HST)
(4) Power Steering
(5) Flow Priority Valve
(6) Oil Cooler
(7) Rear Hydraulic
Outlet
(8) Oil Strainer
(9) Hydraulic Block Type
Outlet
(10) Hydraulic Pump
(11) HydraulicCylinder
(12) Lowering Speed Adjusting
Valve
(13) Relief Valve
B177F803
5
,
,
-
--'
:------1:
I
(:~
I -
I _
~-----
®
1--'
I I
._y
,
I
,
I
I
I
I
,
.~
®
~I
L.
---I~~
Oil Flow in Neutral
State
B177F853
E8-M2
8
HYDRAU
Lie
SYSTEM
II
Hydraulic System
The
hydraulic
system
of
these
tractors
are
composed
of
a hydraulic pump, hydraulic block type
outlet,
control valve, hydraulic cylinder, hydraulic oil
filter
and
other
components.
This system
has
the
following
functions.
1.
Position control
of
the
rear implement connected
to
the
3-point hitch.
2.
Hydraulic
power
take
off
from
the
hydraulic block
type
outlet
to
operate the implements
such
as
a
front
loader,
front
blade and etc.
[2] HYDRAULIC PUMP
B1700·B21 00·B2400 WSM, 11772
• Oil
is
supplied by a hydraulic pump connected
to
the engine. When
an
engine
is
started, a hydraulic
pump starts running,
sucks
oil from a transmission
case.
The
hydraulic pump forces
out
the
oil
to
power
steering,
hydraulic
block
type
outlet,
control valve, hydraulic cylinder and
hydrostatic
transmission (only
for
HST).
Displacement
Engine speed
Condition
22.0.D/min.
13.2to13.7MPa
5.8
U.S.GPM
At
2600 rpm
135
to
140 kg/cm
2
4.8Imp.GPM
1920
to
1991
psi
The
hydraulic pump
is
composed
of
the casing (1),
cover (3), side plate (5), and
two
spur gears (drive
gear
(4)
and driven gear (2»
that
are in mesh.
Hydraulic pump
is
driven by the fuel camshaft.
Maximum displacement
is
as
follows.
B177F805
4
5
(1) Casing
(2) Driven Gear
(3) Cover
(4) Drive Gear
(5)
Side
Plate
[3] FLOW PRIORITY VALVE
The
flow
priority
valve
is
a
flow
devider
that
devides
the
flow
from
single
hydraulic
source
(hydraulic pump)
to
actuates
two
circuits
(position
control
circuit
and
power
steering
circuit)
simultaneously.
This
valve feeds fixedly controlled
flow
(5
il
min,
1.3
U.S.
GPM,
1.1
Imp.
GPM)
to
the
PF
port
with
priority
and
excessive
flow
to
the
EF
port.
1
B177F806
t
P Port
3
(1) Spring
(2) Spool
(3)
Valve Body
E8-M3
B1700·B2100·B2400
WSM,11772
[4] POSITION CONTROL VALVE
8 HYDRAULie SYSTEM
This
position
control
valve
is
located
under
the
hydraulic
cylinder block.
III Neutral
Oil forced
into
the
control
valve
through
the
P
port
pushes open
the
unload
poppet
(5)
and
then
returns
to
the
transmission
case
through
the
T1
port.
Oil behind
the
unload
poppet
(5)
returns
to
the
transmission
case
through
the
spool (4) and
the
T3
port.
Since
the
poppet
2 (1) and
poppet
1 (2) are closed,
oil
in
the
hydraulic
cylinder
does
not
flow
to
the
transmission
case.
Thus,
the
implement
remains
at
its
fixed position.
P:
Pump
Port
Tl,
T2,
T3:
Tank
Port
c:
Cylinder
Port
(1)
Poppet
2
(4)
Spool
(2)
Poppet
1
(5)
Unload
Poppet
(3)
Plunger
B193F805
-
III
Lift
When
the
control
lever
is
set
to
the
LIFT
position,
the
spool (4)
is
move
to
the
right.
The oil forced
into
the
control
valve
through
the
P
port
flows
to
the
back
of
the
unload
poppet
(5)
to
close it.
The oil pushes open
the
poppet
1 (2), and
flows
into
the
hydraulic cylinder
through
the
C
port
to
lift
the
implement.
P:
Pump
Port
Tl,
T2,
T3:
Tank
Port
c:
Cylinder
Port
(1)
Poppet
2 (4)
Spool
(2)
Poppet
1 (5)
Unload
Poppet
(3)
Plunger
B193F806
III
Down
When
the
control
lever
is
moved
to
DOWN
position,
the
spool (5)
is
move
to
the
left,
and
the
poppet
2 (2)
is
also move
to
the
left
by
the
lever (1).
Oil in
the
hydraulic cylinder
is
forced
out
to
the
transmission
case
through
the
T2
port
by
the
weight
of
the
implement,
causing
the
implement
to
lower.
Oil forced
into
the
control
valve
through
the
P
port
pushes open
the
unload
poppet
(6) and returns
to
the
transmission
case
through
the
T1
port.
B193F807
P:
Pump
Port
c:
Cylinder
Port
(1) Lever
(2)
Poppet
2
(3)
Poppet
1
E8-M4
Tl,
T2,
T3:
Tank
Port
(4)
Plunger
(5) Spool
(6).
Unload
Poppet
8 HYDRAU
Lie
SYSTEM
B1700·B21
00·B2400
WSM,
11772
Tl,
T3:
Tank Port
(5)
Passage 5
(6)
Spool
(7) Unload Poppet
(8) Plunger
II
Shockless Mechanism
The
control
valve
is
provided
with
a shockless
mechanism. This
is
intended
to
reduce a sudden
change
of
the oil pressure and
flow
when
the
three
point
linkage
system begins
to
going
up
or
stop
going up.
As
a result, operator does
not
feel
the
unpleasant shock.
1.
When
the
three
point
linkage system starts going
up, the spool
(6)
is
located
slightly
at
the
right
from the neutral position. (Fig.
B)
2.
The
oil fed from hydraulic pump
flows
in
passages
3 (3) and 4 (4) by
the
difference
of
the
hole
diameter, and
pushes
the plunger
(8)
to
the
left.
Then
the
passages
4
(4)
and 5
(5)
connect
to
each
other, and
the
oil
between
them
return
to
the
transmission
case
through
the
clearance between
the valve body and the spool
(6)
and
through
the
T3
port.
In
this way,
the
plunger (8) returns
to
the
rightmost position. (
Fig.
Band
C)
3.
As
a result,
the
oil pressure
is
controlled
not
to
rise
suddenly.
The
shock
at
the start
of
lifting
is
thus
reduced.
4.
When the spool (6) comes close
to
the
neutral
position by the motions
of
feedback linkage,
the
oil pressure gradually drops by
the
slit provided in
the spool
(6).
Therefore the shock
at
the
stop
of
lifting
is
reduced. (Fig.
D)
c p
B
P:
Pump Port
C:
Cylinder Port
S:
Slit
(1)
Passage 1
(2)
Passage 2
(3)
Passage 3
C
(4) Passage 4
C P
A
Tl
D
c
B193F808
Tl
E8-M5
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11772
[5]
FEEDBACK LINKAGE
FOR
POSITION CONTROL
B193F809
'~.
5>---41
8 HYDRAULie SYSTEM
(1)
Lift
Arm
RH
(2) Feedback
Rod
(3) Control Lever Shaft
(4) Position Control Lever
(5) Feedback
Arm
(6) Feedback Arm Shaft
(7) Connecting Link
(8) Control Lever
Arm
(9) Lever
When
the
position
control
lever (4) moved
to
rearward
to
lift
the
implement,
the
spool
of
the
position control valve
is
pushed in
to
form a raising
circuit by
the
motions
of
control lever arm (7), control
lever shaft (3), connecting
link
(8)
and the lever
(9).
And
after
the
lift
arm (1) moves upward, the spool
is
pulled
out
and return
to
form a neutral circuit by the
motions
of
feedback rod (2),
feedback
arm (5),
feedback arm shaft (6), connecting link
(8)
and the
lever
(9).
As
a result,the
implement
height
can
be easily
determined in proportion
to
the
set position
of
the
position control lever
(4).
E8-M6
8 HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11772
[6]
RELIEF
VALVE
B177F811
13.2
to
13.7
MPa
135
to
140
kgf/cm
2
1920
to
1991
psi
Maximum
45
to
55°C
113
to
131°F
Engine speed:
Oil
temperature:
The Three
point
hydraulic
system
circuit
has
a
relief valve
to
restrict the maximum pressure in
the
circuit.
The
relief valve
is
located
top
of
the
hydraulic
cylinder body.
The
relief valve
is
of
the
guide piston type
with
damping effect.
Among
direct
acting
relief
valves,
this
type
is
suited
to
higher
pressure and has large capacity.
Furthermore,
this
type
is
free
from
unstable
operation,
such
as
chattering, which occurs often in
direct acting relief valves.
As
shown in
the
figure,
the
guide
is
attached
to
the poppet
(5)
and a valve chamber
D.C.
(called
the
damping chamber)
is
formed
at
the
bottom
of
the
guide piston.
The
inlet
of
the
valve leads
to
the
chamber via a clearance between
the
sliding
portion
of
the
guide
and
the
seat (6),
minimizing
valve
vibration
with
the
damping effect
ofthe
chamber.
When the oil pressure in
the
circuit
is
lower
than
the setting pressure
of
the
relief
valve,
the
relief
valve
is
not
operated and
the
oil fed
to
the
relief
valve
from
the
hydraulic
pump
flows
into
the
position control valve.
As
the oil pressure in
the
circuit increases,
so
does
the pressure in the damping chamber
D.C.
When
the
pressure
rises
above
the
valve setting and overcomes
the spring force,
the
valve opens. Qil then flows
out
to
the transmission
case
through
T port, preventing
any
further
rise
in pressure.
The
valve
closes
again
when enough oil
is
released
to
drop
pressure
below
the
valve setting.
(Reference)
• Relief Valve setting pressure:
4
2 3
I
T Port I
(To Transmission Case)
I
I
I
+
To Position Control
Valve
[-
From Hydraulic _
Pump
From Hydraulic
Pump
- L--.-cll.V----'"="
D.C.: Damping Chamber
P:
Pump Port
C:
Cylinder Port
T:
Tank Port
(1)
Plug
(2)
Washer
(3) Shim
(4)
Hydraulic Cylinder Body
(5)
Poppet
(6)
Seat
E8-M7
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11772
SERVICING
TROUBLESHOOTING
8 HYDRAU
L1C
SYSTEM
Symptom
Probable Cause Solution
Reference
Page
Implement
Does
• Control valve broken
Replace
E8-S5
Not
Rise
• Control valve
improperly
adjusted
Adjust
E8-S6
(No Noise)
• Control valve
improperly
assembled
Repair
E8-S5
•
Rei
ief
valve spring damaged
Replace
8-S11
• Spool sticks
Repair
E8-S6
• Piston
a-ring
or
cylinder damaged
Replace
8-S10
(Noise)
•
ail
strainer
or
oil
filter
cartridge clogged
Clean
or
Replace
-
• Suction pipe loosen
or
broken
Repair
or
Replace
-
• Suction pipe connecting hose loosen
or
Repair
or
Replace
-
broken
• Suction pipe
a-ring
broken
Replace
-
•
Insufficient
transmission oil
Refill
G-8
• Relief valve setting pressure
too
low
Adjust
or
Replace
8-S8
• Hydraulic
pump
broken
Replace
E8-S4
Implement
Does
•
Feedback rod
improperly
adjusted
Adjust
8-S8
Not
Reach
Maximum
Height
Implement
Does
• Control valve
malfunctioning
Repair
or
Replace
E8-S5
Not
Lower
Implement
Drops
by
• Hydraulic cylinder
worn
or
damaged
Replace
E8-S5
Its
Weight
• Piston
a-ring
worn
or
damaged
Replace
E8-S5
• Control valve
malfunctioning
Replace
E8-S5
Implement
Hunts
• Control valve
improperly
adjusted
Adjust
E8-S6
E8-S1
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11772
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torques
of
screws and nuts on
the
table
bellow
is
especially specified.
(For general
use
screws and nuts:
See
page
G-8)
8 HYDRAU
L1C
SYSTEM
Item
Nom
kgfom
ft·lbs
Fuel
cut
off
solenoid
mounting
screws
9.80
to
11.2 1.00
to
1.15
7.24to
8.32
Fuel
filter
bracket
mounting
screws
23.6
to
27.4 2.4
to
2.8 17.4
to
20.2
Flow
priority
valve
mounting
screws
17.7to20.6
1.8
to
2.1
13.0
to
15.2
Delivery pipe flare nuts
29.4to
39.2 3.0
to
4.0 21.7
to
28.9
Hydraulic
pump
mounting
screw and
nut
23.6to
27.4 2.4
to
2.8
17.4to
20.2
Cover
mounting
screw
34.3
to
39.2 3.5
to
4.0 25.3
to
28.9
Connecting plate
mounting
screws and nuts
39.2
to
44.1
4.0to4.5
28.9
to
32.5
Top
link
bracket
mounting
screws
77.5
to
90.1
7.9
to
9.2 57.2
to
66.5
Hydraulic cylinder assembly
mounting
screws and 39.2
to
44.1
4.0
to
4.5 28.9
to
32.5
nuts
Position control valve
mounting
screws
23.6to27.4
2.4to
2.8 17.4
to
20.2
Reliefvalve plug
49.0to
68.6
5.0
to
7.0 36.2
to
50.6
Plug 1
29.4
to
49.0
3.0
to
5.0
21.7
to
36.2
Plug 2
29.4to
49.0 3.0
to
5.0 21.7
to
36.2
Plug 3
39.2
to
58.8
4.0
to
6.0 28.9
to
43.4
Plug 4
7.85
to
11.77
0.8to
1.2
5.79to
8.68
E8-S3
B1700·B2100·B2400 WSM,11772 8 HYDRAU
L1C
SYSTEM
(1) Position Control Valve
Position control valve
23.6to27.4N·m
Tightening
torque
mounting screws
2.4
to
2.8
kgf'm
17.4
to
20.2 ft-Ibs
B193P807
[2] HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (HYDRAULIC CYLINDER, POSITION
CONTROL VALVE,
RELIEF
VALVE
AND
ETC)
DISASSEMBLING
AND
ASSEMBLING
(1) Disassembling Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly
Position
Control
Valve
1.
Remove
the
position control valve
mounting
screws, and
remove
the
position control valve (1).
(When reassembling)
.. Take care
not
to
damage
the
a-rings.
Lift Arm, Hydraulic
Arm
Shaft
and
Hydraulic
ArlT!
1.
Remove the external snap ring, and remove
the
lift
arm
LH
(3).
2. Draw
out
the hydraulic arm shaft (2) and
lift
arm
RH
(1)
as
a
unit.
(When
reassembling)
..
Align
the
alignment
marks (5)
of
the
hydraulic
arm and
hydraulic arm shaft.
..
Align
the
alignment
marks (6)
of
the
lift
arm
LH
and
hydraulic arm shaft.
..
Apply
grease
to
the
right
and
left
bushings and
a-rings
.
.. Take care
not
to
damage
the
a-rings.
(1)
Lift
Arm
RH
(2) Hydraulic Arm Shaft
(3)
Lift
Arm
LH
(4) Hydraulic Arm
(5)
Alignment
Marks
(6)
Alignment
Marks
B193P809
E8-S5
8 HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
81700'82100·82400 WSM, 11772
(3) Nuts
(1) Spool
(2) Lever
8193P810
8193F814
0
(2) Disassembling Position Control Valve
Spool
1.
Remove the nuts (3).
2. Draw
out
the spool (1)
with
the lever (2).
III IMPORTANT
• Measure the length (A)
before
disassembling,
and make
sure
to
reset
it
when
reassembling.
(Reference)
• When the poppet 2
is
completely closed,
the
distance (B)
between valve body and
nut
becomes approximately 32.3
to
32.5 mm (1.27
to
1.28 in.).
Plunger
1. Remove the plug 4 (1), and
draw
out
the
plunger
(2) and
spring
(3) from the spool (4).
(When reassembling)
• Take care
not
to
damage
the
O-ring.
7.85
to
11.77 N'm
Tightening
torque
Plug 4 0.8
to
1.2
kgf'm
5.79
to
8.68 ft-Ibs
8193P811
(1) Plug 4
(2) Plunger
(3) Spring
(4) Spool
3
Poppet 1
1.
Remove the plug 1 (3), and
draw
out
the
poppet
1
(2)
and
spring
(1).
(When reassembling)
• Take care
not
to
damage
the
O-ring.
29.4
to
49.0 N'm
Tightening
torque
Plug 1 3.0
to
5.0
kgf·m
21.7
to
36.2 ft-Ibs
8193P812
(1) Spring
(2) Poppet 1
(3)
Plug 1
E8-S6
81700·82100·82400 WSM,11772
8 HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
Poppet 2 and Unload Poppet
1.
Remove
the
plug 3 (4), and
draw
out
the
poppet
2 (5) and
spring (6).
2.
Remove
the
plug 2 (1), and
draw
out
the
unload
poppet
(2)
and spring (3).
(When reassembling)
• Take care
not
to
damage
the
O-ring.
39.2
to
58.8 N'm
Plug
3
4.0
to
6.0
kgf'm
Tightening
torque
28.9
to
43.4 ft-Ibs
29.4to49.0
N'm
Plug
2
3.0
to
5.0
kgf'm
21.7
to
36.2 ft-Ibs
(1) Plug 2
(2) Unload Poppet
(3)
Spring
E8-S7
(4)
Plug 3
(5)
Poppet 2
(6)
Spring
KUBOTA Corporation
Printed in
Japan
9508, J, AK, AK,
e,
17
(2)
Code No. 97897-11771
9503,
J,
AK,
AK,
e,
17
… 13 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Kubota B2400 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Kubota B2400 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 15,69 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Kubota B2400

Kubota B2400 Installatiehandleiding - English - 233 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info